diff options
author | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2024-01-31 03:01:01 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info> | 2024-01-31 03:01:01 +0000 |
commit | 79e1bbc1ad6b308aa2074540b2afd43b6a72ce03 (patch) | |
tree | 32074e03eec88cf72e5973ddff176a0534c77dff /macros/text1/cms_help_files | |
parent | 084f5d8435744b7ea7ef487ec111a7bfd100ed62 (diff) |
CTAN sync 202401310301
Diffstat (limited to 'macros/text1/cms_help_files')
277 files changed, 0 insertions, 11688 deletions
diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f deleted file mode 100644 index fc45137071..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--footn.help4--f +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \footnotestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \footnotestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the numbering style for the -footnotes. The format for the \footnotestyle command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \footnotestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of four possible values: - - 1 which gives numbered footnotes 1, 2, 3, etc. - (1) which gives numbered footnotes included in parentheses (1), (2) - a which gives lettered footnotes a, b, c, etc. - (a) which gives lettered footnotes enclosed in parentheses (a), (b) - -The \footnotestyle default is \footnotestyle{(1)} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert deleted file mode 100644 index 872fadaa4f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1--verti.helpvert +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or -the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force -the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace -(\vs) command is: - - \verticalspace{x} - -Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For -example, - - \verticalspace{4\bl} - -will leave four blank lines, and - - \verticalspace{2in} - -will leave two inches of blank space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index a67f3982ae..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/10noter.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the -footnote reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format -for the \notereferencefont command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \notereferencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 8b39bf09ae..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/11noter.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the -footnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six -possible note numbering styles: - \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." - \notereferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..." - \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." - \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." - \notereferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..." - \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." - -The format for the \notereferencestyle command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \notereferencestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default -is \notereferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index c74fb65186..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/12noter.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the amount of space between -the footnote reference number and the text of the footnotes. The format for -the \notereferencegutter command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \notereferencegutter{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.). -\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the -footnote reference numbers and the text of the notes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index e0c19a24b8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1block.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \blockquotebegin (\bqb) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \blockquotebegin (\bqb) command will begin a new paragraph and indent the -following text the amount of the current paragraph indentation on both the left -and right margins. If the current paragraph indentation value is zero, the -indentation for the block quote will be one-half inch. The format for the -\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is: - - \blockquotebegin - tttttt - tttttt - tttttt - \blockquoteend - -Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The -\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command is always used in conjunction with the -\blockquoteend (\bqe) command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index af55b6bbd7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1every.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format -within the footnote. The format for the \fortmatfootnote command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \everyfootnote{options - }} - -Where "options" is one or more of the following. - - \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent - \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip - \singlespace \doublespace font changes - \justify - -For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the -markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index de87d7cf5d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everye.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \everyendnote COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \everyendnote command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat -(\enf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format within the -endnote. The format for the \everyendnote command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \everyendnote{options - }} - -Where "options" is one or more of the following. - - \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent - \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip - \singlespace \doublespace font changes - \justify - -For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the -markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index ecd02acc90..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1everyf.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \everyfootnote COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \everyfootnote command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format -within the footnote. The format for the \everyfootnote command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \everyfootnote{options - }} - -Where "options" is one or more of the following. - - \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \leftindent - \rightindent \rightragged \interlineskip - \singlespace \doublespace font changes - \justify - -For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the -markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index 9ba197b3e8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1numbe.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\subheadbformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadb -titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: - - \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} - } - -where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadb is -\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index 9f2fe89806..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/1number.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\subheadaformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheada -titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: - - \subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} - } - -where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheada is -\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f deleted file mode 100644 index 24d6dbb6ca..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--footn.help4--f +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \footnotereferencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \footnotereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnotereferenceformat command, and establishes what font will be used to set -the footnote reference numbers. The format for the \footnotereferencefont -command is: - - \footnotereferenceformat{ - \footnotereferencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is a valid font style (\sf, \bf, \it, etc.). The default footnote -reference font is the standardface font. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert deleted file mode 100644 index 7b10e91285..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2--verti.helpvert +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) command will leave vertical space at the -beginning of a page or for a figure, plate, table, or any other reason when you -need to have the entire space specified kept intact. If the specified space -will not fit on the current page, it will be printed at the top of the -following page and the remaining current page will remain blank, causing you to -receive an underfull vbox warning. The \verticalspacekeep (\vsk) format is: - - \verticalspacekeep{xx} - -Where "xx" is the amount of vertical space expressed in any valid TeX -measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or in number of lines to be left for the figure. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 2e72dd23cf..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2block.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \blockquoteend (\bqe) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \blockquoteend (\bqe) command ends a block quote and starts a new -paragraph. The format for the \blockquoteend (\bqe) command is: - - \blockquotebegin - tttttt - tttttt - tttttt - \blockquoteend - -Where the "tttttt" designates the text included as the block quote. The -\blockquoteend (\bqe) command is always used in conjunction with the -\blockquotebegin (\bqb) command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index f20d126e79..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footn.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that -divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for -the \footnotedivider command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \footnotedivider{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \footnotedivider{1.5in} - } - -would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half -inches long. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index f20d126e79..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2footno.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \footnotedivider COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \footnotedivider command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the length for the line that -divides the page text from the beginning of the footnote text. The format for -the \footnotedivider command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \footnotedivider{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \footnotedivider{1.5in} - } - -would make the horizontal rule before the footnote text to be one and one-half -inches long. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 2f7d5f5372..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2skipbe.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the \endnoteformat -(\enf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space before the endnotes -are printed. The format for the \skipbefore command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \skipbefore{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, -etc.). For example, - - \endnoteformat{ - \skipbefore{1.5in} - } - -would put one and one-half inches of vertical space before the beginning of the -endnote text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index 98cab4d1b5..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/2title.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat -command and will set options for the subheadb titles. The format for the -\titleformat command is: - - \subheadbformat{\titleformat{ - \vsk{24pt} - {\it \subheadbtitle} - \vs{12pt}} - } - -This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadb command will space down 24 -points, print the \subheadbtitle in italics and space down 12 points to resume -with the text. - -For more information on the \subheadbtitle command, see the help screen under -the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 98eb00954f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3befor.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \beforefootnoteskip COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \beforefootnoteskip command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space -between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the -\beforefootnoteskip command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \beforefootnoteskip{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \beforefootnoteskip{1.5in} - } - -would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and -the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu deleted file mode 100644 index b8517f05b6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3block.helpmenu +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ - Menu for BLOCKQUOTEFORMAT -- TEXT1 - -A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character -of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when -a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that -doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP -COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and -options type HELP HELP. - - -skipafter (space after block quotes) -skipbefore (space before block quotes) -blockquoteparagraphformat (establishing paragraph options - within block quotes) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 7a2445ec78..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3every.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \everyblockquote COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \everyblockquote command is always used in conjunction with the -\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set options for the paragraph format -within the blockquote. The format for the \everyblockquote command is: - - \blockquoteformat{ - \everyblockquote{options - }} - -Where "options" is one or more of the following. - - \paragraphindent \paragraphskip \interlineskip - \justify \rightragged font changes - \singlespace \doublespace \leftindent - \rightindent - -For more information on any of these options see the help screen under the -markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index e58c80f034..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incon.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadbformat -command and will determine whether subheadb titles are included in the Table of -Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: - - \subheadbformat{ - \incontents{yes} - } - -By default, the subheadb titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. -If you want the subheadb titles included in the Table of Contents, enter -\incontents{yes} within the \subheadbformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index b5f4b3d717..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3incont.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadaformat -command and will determine whether subheada titles are included in the Table of -Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: - - \subheadaformat{ - \incontents{yes} - } - -By default, the subheada titles will be included in the Table of Contents. If -you do not want the subheada titles included in the Table of Contents, enter -\incontents{no} within the \subheadaformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index bc6ebaf65d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipb.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space -between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the -\skipbeforedivider command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipbeforedivider{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, -etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipbeforedivider{1.5in} - } - -would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and -the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index bc6ebaf65d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3skipbe.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipbeforedivider COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipbeforedivider command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space -between the page text and the footnote divider. The format for the -\skipbeforedivider command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipbeforedivider{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, -etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipbeforedivider{1.5in} - } - -would put one and one-half inches of vertical space between the page text and -the footnote dividing rule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 2649fb0153..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/3textre.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference -number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format for the -\textreferenceposition command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \textreferenceposition{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give -superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers within the text. -\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers -within the text on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu deleted file mode 100644 index e0ab64ea02..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4footn.helpmenu +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ - Menu for FOOTNOTEREFERENCEFORMAT Commands -- TEXT1 - -A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character -of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when -a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that -doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP -COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and -options type HELP HELP. - - -1--footnotestyle (the numbering style of the footnotes) -2--footnotereferencefont (the font used to set footnote - reference numbers) -3--precede (positioning of the footnote reference number before word) -4--follow (positioning the footnote reference number after the word) -5--superscript (superscript footnote reference numbers) -6--notsuperscript (footnote reference numbers not superscript) - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 08e7cd3e11..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4refer.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \referenceposition COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \referenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote -reference number is a superscript number or not. The format for the -\referenceposition command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \referenceposition{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \referenceposition{up} will give -superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers. -\referenceposition{down} will give regular-sized footnote reference numbers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index ba168c90f2..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipaf.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipafterdivider COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipafterdivider command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space -between the footnote divider and the beginning of the text of the first -footnote. The format for the \skipafterdivider command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipafterdivider{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is expressed in \baselines or any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, -etc.). For example, - - \footnoteformat{ - \skipafterdivider{5pt} - } - -would put five points of vertical space between the the footnote dividing rule -and the text of the first footnote. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index c1430e9b33..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4skipb.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipbefore COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipbefore command is always used in conjunction with the -\blockquoteformat (\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space -that is to be skipped before the blockquote begins. The format for the -\skipbefore command is: - - \blockquoteformat{ - \skipbefore{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any -legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the -\skipbefore command will be added to the current paragraph skip before -beginning the first paragraph of the blockquote. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index f80277833c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/4textre.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote -reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the -\textreferencefont command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \textreferencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 5f70c16e4e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5refer.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \referenceplacement COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \referenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote -reference number is placed before or after the footnote reference word. The -format for the \referenceplacement command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \referenceplacement{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \referenceplacement{after} will -place the footnote reference number after the word. \referenceplacement{before} -will place the footnote reference number before the word referenced. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 3a4794e3a1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5skipa.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \skipafter COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \skipafter command is always used in conjunction with the \blockquoteformat -(\bqf) command, and will set the amount of vertical space that is to be skipped -after the last paragraph of the blockquote ends. The format for the \skipafter -command is: - - \blockquoteformat{ - \skipafter{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is the amount of space desired, expressed in number of lines or any -legal TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The amount of space indicated in the -\skipafter command will be added to the current paragraph skip after ending the -last paragraph of the blockquote and before beginning the next paragraph of the -regular text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 96e3aab143..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the -endnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible -text numbering styles: - \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." - \textreferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2], ..." - \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." - \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..." - \textreferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..." - \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." - -The format for the \textreferencestyle command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \textreferencestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default -is \textreferencestyle{[1]}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 518c8f518d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/5textre.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferenceposition COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote -reference number within the text is a superscript number or not. The format -for the \textreferenceposition command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \textreferenceposition{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \textreferenceposition{up} will give -superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers within the text. -\textreferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers -within the text on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 1c6002625d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6notere.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine whether the endnote reference -number within the text of the endnotes is a superscript number or not. The -format for the \notereferenceposition command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \notereferenceposition{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give -superscript numbers for the endnote reference numbers in the notes. -\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the endnote reference numbers in -the notes on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 55dda0ef13..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6refer.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \referencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \referencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the -footnote reference numbers are printed. The format for the \referencefont -command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \referencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 79eb463bae..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/6textre.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferenceplacement COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferenceplacement command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote -reference number within the text is placed before or after the footnote -reference word. The format for the \textreferenceplacement command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \textreferenceplacement{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "before" or "after". \textreferenceplacement{after} will -place the footnote reference number after the word in the text. -\textreferenceplacement{before} will place the footnote reference number before -the referenced word in the text. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 8b29d46327..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7notere.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the font in which the endnote -reference numbers in the text of the notes are printed. The format for the -\notereferencefont command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \notereferencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index a3d8622991..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7refer.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \referencestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \referencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the -footnote reference numbers are printed. There are four possible numbering -styles: - \referencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." - \referencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." - \referencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." - \referencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." - -The format for the \referencestyle command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \referencestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of the four valid style designations given above. The -default is \referencestyle{(1)}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index b827caaa77..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/7textre.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,14 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferencefont COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferencefont command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the font in which the -footnote reference numbers in the text are printed. The format for the -\textreferencefont command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \textreferencefont{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is some font designations such as \bf, \it, \littlefont, etc. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 0728adcc36..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8notere.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the style in which the -endnote reference numbers within the notes are printed. There are six possible -note numbering styles: - \notereferencestyle{1} for numbered endnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." - \notereferencestyle{[1]} for numbered endnotes "[1], [2] ..." - \notereferencestyle{(1)} for numbered endnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." - \notereferencestyle{a} for lettered endnotes "a, b, c, ..." - \notereferencestyle{[a]} for lettered endnotes "[a], [b] ..." - \notereferencestyle{(a)} for lettered endnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." - -The format for the \notereferencestyle command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \notereferencestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default -is \notereferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index 5cef5c7d45..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/8textre.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \textreferencestyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \textreferencestyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine the style in which the -footnote reference numbers within the text are printed. There are six possible -text numbering styles: - \textreferencestyle{1} for numbered footnotes "1, 2, 3, ..." - \textreferencestyle{1.} for numbered footnotes "1., 2., 3., ..." - \textreferencestyle{(1)} for numbered footnotes "(1), (2), (3), ..." - \textreferencestyle{a} for lettered footnotes "a, b, c, ..." - \textreferencestyle{a.} for lettered footnotes "a., b., c., ..." - \textreferencestyle{(a)} for lettered footnotes "(a), (b), (c), ..." - -The format for the \textreferencestyle command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \textreferencestyle{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is one of the six valid style designations given above. The default -is \textreferencestyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn deleted file mode 100644 index 1c9007ef54..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpendn +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferencegutter COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferencegutter command is always used in conjunction with the -\endnoteformat (\enf) command, and will determine the amount of space between -the endnote reference number and the text of the endnotes. The format for the -\notereferencegutter command is: - - \endnoteformat{ - \notereferencegutter{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is any number and valid TeX measurement (in, pc, pts, etc.). -\notereferencegutter{1em} is the default and will give one emspace between the -endnote reference numbers and the text of the notes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot deleted file mode 100644 index beddf74b27..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/9notere.helpfoot +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \notereferenceposition COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \notereferenceposition command is always used in conjunction with the -\footnoteformat (\fnf) command, and will determine whether the footnote -reference number within the text of the footnotes is a superscript number or -not. The format for the \notereferenceposition command is: - - \footnoteformat{ - \notereferenceposition{xx} - } - -Where "xx" is either "up" or "down". \notereferenceposition{up} will give -superscript numbers for the footnote reference numbers in the notes. -\notereferenceposition{down} will give print the footnote reference numbers in -the notes on the baseline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 00b597ddac..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aen.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,72 +0,0 @@ - HELPMARK D1 -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| autoendnote | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\aenã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \autoendnote markup adds notes to the end of a document or the end -of a chapter. It has one parameter, the text of the endnote, which it -places in working storage to be printed when called by \printendnotes. An -endnote reference number is placed in the text where the markup occurred. -By default this reference number is surrounded by square brackets. The -endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of -\autoendnote. - - ã|Example:ã% -There is a well-marked division of -labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be -different in the geological world, but they are not.} -Details of organization have evolved by an -optimization . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| There is a well-marked division of labor.[1] Details of organization | -| have evolved by an optimization . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The endnote printed following the next \printendnotes markup would look -like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but | -| they are not. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You cannot use \autoendnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, \asisbegin, -\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, -\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. - The endnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To -reset the endnote number outside of a \part, use the \setendnotenumber -markup. - Use the \endnoteformat markup to change the \autoendnote style. - There are occasions when you need to include a very long endnote. If -the endnote exceeds 2,048 characters in length, you will need to split the -note into two parts as follows. First, at the beginning of your document -you will need to include a special definition for a new markup. You may -give it any name you choose. For this example, we'll define a markup called -\continue. Enter these three lines at the top of the document: - -\catcode'*=11 -\let\continue=\en*w -\catcode'*=12 - -Next, break the endnote into paragraphs of not more than 2,048 characters -each. In the source below, the sentence beginning "First paragraph" is -the first paragraph with not more than 2,048 characters, and the second -paragraph beginning "Second paragraph" is the last paragraph of the endnote. - -line containt the note.\autoendnote{First paragraph -of a very long endnote . . . } -\continue{Second paragraph of the long endnote, -which will print in the \printendnotes after -the first paragraph} -Sentence following the word "note." diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 0e764aa0b7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/afn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| autofootnote | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\afnã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \autofootnote markup adds footnotes to a page. The footnote can be -placed anywhere within text, without interrupting formatting. When the -document is formatted, the place of the footnote is marked with a number. -The text of the note is put at the bottom of the page. The footnote number -will be automatically incremented by one for each use of \autofootnote. - - ã|Example:ã% -communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, -rank, and sexual desire --- among themselves by -means of nonsyntactical signals.\autofootnote{such -as crashing together} Individuals are aware of -members and nonmembers of their group. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | -| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) | -| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The footnote would print as follows at the bottom of the page: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| 1. such as crashing together | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The text of the note must be enclosed with curly braces, otherwise following -text will be taken as footnote text, until all available space for footnotes -is exhausted. - You cannot use \autofootnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, -\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, -\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. - The footnote number is reset to 1 at the beginning of each part. To -reset the footnote number outside of a \part, use the \setfootnotenumber -markup. - To change the footnote style, use the \footnoteformat markup. - When using \monospace, the footnote in the text of the document is -surrounded by parenthesis, instead of superscripted. The previous \auto- -footnote sample output would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| communicate most important things --- hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | -| desire --- among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals.(1) | -| Individuals are aware of members and nonmembers of their group. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index dc70ed9c37..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aib.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| asisbegin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\aibã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \asisbegin markup forces the following text into an unformatted block. -Each line is printed as it was entered. Line breaks and interword spacing -are honored. TEXT1 markup within an "as is" sequence is limited to -\verticalspace, \verticalspacekeep, \autofootnote, and font changes. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\monospace - -\centerline{Elements of the Spheres} - -\vs{12pt} -\asisbegin -Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere -Oxygen 62.10 60.60 -Hydrogen 01.10 00.10 -Sodium 00.001 00.400 -\asisend -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Elements of the Spheres | -| | -| | -| | -| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | -| Oxygen 62.10 60.60 | -| Hydrogen 01.10 00.10 | -| Sodium 00.001 00.400 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The columns will only line up if you are using \monospace or \typewriter. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you use accents while in \asisbegin, you must surround the accented -letter with curly braces. - -lowest common denominator. -\vs{12pt} -\centerline{\bd Outline} -\aib -\vs{6pt} -The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record - Elementary Concepts: Toasting the \c{C}rust - Principles of Population Geology -\aie -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -| lowest common denominator. | -| | -| | -| Outline | -| | -| The Morality of Rock in the Fossil Record | -| Elementary Concepts: Toasting the Crust | -| Principles of Population Geology | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - - ã|Notes:ã% -With the monospaced font you can use the "as is" sequence to have TEXT1 -obey precisely your text placement, including space between words. With -proportionally spaced fonts only the lead blanks would line up; blanks -"inside" the text would be different widths (depending on the width of -previous characters). - - Font changes within an \asisbegin may change the horizontal spacing. - Every \asisbegin must have a matching \asisend. - You cannot use \asisbegin within any of the following markup: \appen- -dix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, \figure, -\footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, \preface, -\rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, \subheadb, -\subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3fd9d98509..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aie.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| asisend | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\aieã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \asisend markup ends an "as is" series. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\aib - This fortress built by Nature for herself - Against infection and the hand of war, - (Richard II) -\aie -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| This fortress built by Nature for herself | -| Against infection and the hand of war, | -| (Richard II) | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each \asisend must have a matching \asisbegin. Omitting the ending \asisend -will produce the following error message: - -(\end occurred inside a group at level 2) -Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes). -Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog. - -See \asisformat to modify the defaults for \asisbegin and -\asisbegin. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 17657f596f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/aif.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| asisformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\aifã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyasis, \skipafterã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \asisformat markup allows you to modify the "as is" block. The "as is" -markup skips 1 blank line (a baseline) before and after the series. There -is no indentation from the left. - -\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip -is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl. - -\everyasis{Nested Markup} determines how the 'as is' text is printed. This -submarkup is only valid within the asisformat markup. Spacing and font -changes are allowed, but not justification, right indentation, or other -paragraph information. - -\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. The default skip -is 6pt. If you are using \monospace, the default skip is 1\bl. - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the "as is" text is to be indented 7 picas from the left -margin, the text is to be printed in ten point typewriter, and 4 points -skipped before and after. - -\asisformat{\skipbefore{4pt} - \everyasis{\leftindent{7pc}\tenpt\tt} - \skipafter{4pt}} - -Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: -\cl{\bd Muckles} -\asisbegin -3 eggs beaten -1 cp cream -1 cp flour -1/4t baking powder -1 T sugar -pinch of salt - -bacon (optional) -\aie -Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. -Pour all of -the batter into the pan. Cook approximately -10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces -and serve hot with plenty of syrup. -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: | -| Muckles | -| | -| 3 eggs beaten | -| 1 cp cream | -| 1 cp flour | -| 1/4t baking powder | -| 1 T sugar | -| pinch of salt | -| bacon (optional) | -| | -| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the | -| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and | -| serve hot with plenty of syrup. | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -The \asisformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index 7acf33349e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumbe.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\subheadcformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadc -titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: - - \subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} - } - -where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadc is -\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index d1e541a8c8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/anumber.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \numberingstyle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \numberingstyle command is always used in conjunction with the -\subheaddformat command and will set the style of numbering for the subheadd -titles. The format for the \numberingstyle command is: - - \subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{xxx} - } - -where "xxx" is A, 1, or I. The default \numberingstyle for subheadd is -\numberingstyle{1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index cad86ce1cc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/apf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| appendixformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\apfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that -controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described. - -\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the -default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I). - - ã|Example:ã% - -\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{I}} - -\appendix{Glossary} - -If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Appendix IV | -| Glossary | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the appendix title -banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- -line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within -or outside of \appendixformat: - - * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number. - - * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title. - -\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the -contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title -from being included in the contents. See the second example below. - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are -centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. - -\appendixformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - - \cl{\bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitle} - \vs{1\bl} - } - \incontents{yes} - } - -\app{Glossary} - -This would print the fourth appendix as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 4. Glossary | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using -\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in -italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents. - -\appendixformat{ - \titleformat{\newpage - \vsk{2in} - \cl{\it \appendixtitle} - \vs{1\bl}} - \incontents{no} } - -\app{Glossary} - -This would print the fourth appendix as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Glossary | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a190f27416..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/app.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| appendix | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\appã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \appendix markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold and -adds the title text to the table of contents. Appendices are lettered -consecutively. This markup can be used as often as necessary. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Instead, let humanity strive to make good places, -"eutopias," on earth, peacefully and in good spirit. -\par -\appendix{Calculations from "Nuclear Winter"} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Appendix A | -| Calculations from "Nuclear Winter" | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to the \appendixformat markup if you need to change the appendix -style. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index a72ac7f09e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|APPENDIXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\appendixformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu deleted file mode 100644 index 4e5ea240db..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/appendix.helpmenu +++ /dev/null @@ -1,103 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| appendixformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\appendixformatÅ\numberingstyleÅAÌ - \titleformatÅ\dumpinsertseject - \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold - Appendix \appendixnumberÌ - \centerlineÅ\twelvept\bold\appendixtitleÌ - \vsÅ 1\blÌ - \setchapternumberÅ 0Ì - \setsubheadanumberÅ 0Ì - \setsubheadbnumberÅ 0Ì - \setsubheadcnumberÅ 0Ì - \setsubheaddnumberÅ 0Ì - \setfigurenumberÅ 0Ì - \settablenumberÅ 0Ì - Ì - \incontentsÅ yesÌ -Ì - -Abbreviation: ã|\apfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \appendixformat markup allows you to modify the default markup that -controls the appearance of the appendix title. The submarkup is described. - -\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from capital letters, the -default, to Arabic numerals (1) or roman numerals (I). - - ã|Example:ã% - -\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ IÌÌ -\appendixÅ GlossaryÌ - -If this were the fourth appendix, it would print as: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Appendix IV | -| Glossary | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\titleformatÅNested MarkupÌ controls the appearance of the appendix title -banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- -line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within -or outside of \appendixformat: - - * \appendixnumberprints the most recent appendix number. - - * \appendixtitleprints the most recent appendix title. - -\incontents determines whether the appendix title is to be included in the -contents. The default can be changed to no to inhibit the appendix title -from being included in the contents. See the second example below. - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the appendix starts a new page, the number and title are -centered in bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. - -\appendixformatÅ \numberingstyleÅ 1Ì - \titleformatÅ \dumpinsertseject - \clÅ \bd \appendixnumber. \appendixtitleÌ - \vsÅ 1\blÌ - Ì - \incontentsÅ yesÌ - Ì -\appÅ GlossaryÌ - -This would print the fourth appendix as: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 4. Glossary | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the appendix starts a new page (instead of using -\dumpinsertseject, skips down the page 2 inches, centers the title in -italics, and skips one line. The title is not put in contents. - -\appendixformatÅ - \titleformatÅ \newpage - \vskÅ 2inÌ - \clÅ \it \appendixtitleÌ - \vsÅ 1\blÌÌ - \incontentsÅ noÌ Ì -\appÅ GlossaryÌ - -This would print the fourth appendix as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Glossary | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \appendixformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index cf6437cf5f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asism.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|ASIS-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat -and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 6c3aeeea9b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/asisp.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|ASIS-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the \asisformat -and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 2522f00c01..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bd.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bold | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bdã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bold markup sets the typeface to wide strokes, giving a heavy -impression. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example changes "Parallels" bold. It is changed back with the \roman -markup. - -lowest common denominator. -\par -\bold\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a -moment rocks and deer . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| lowest common denominator. | -| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -The effects of the \bold markup can also be limited by curly braces. - -lowest common denominator. -\par -\nin{\bd Parallels}. Consider for a -moment rocks and deer . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| lowest common denominator. | -| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Note in the last example the period follows the right curly brace (}.). -This is necessary to enable the extra spacing which normally follows -punctuation. - Bold is often used for display titles or special emphasis. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 277feefcba..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bi.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bolditalic | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\biã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bolditalic markup sets the typeface to wide strokes and an italic -slant, giving a heavy impression. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example changes "Parallels" to bold italic. It is changed back with -the \roman markup. - -lowest common denominator. -\par -\bolditalic\nin Parallels. \roman Consider for a -moment rocks and deer . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| lowest common denominator. | -| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | -| --------- | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -All font sets have \bolditalic defined as a valid type face. Not all font -sets, however, have bolditalic available. Those font sets that do not -have bolditalic will give the following warning message when you try to use -\bolditalic or \bi: - -<TEXT1> Warning. No bold italic font in CM12. Will print italic font .) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c827c2717e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bib.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bibliography | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bibã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new page, centers and -prints the title in bold face, and enters the title in contents. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\bibliography{References} -\frenchspacing -\bibentry -Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes -in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications, International. - -\bibentry -Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's -Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. -\par - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| References | -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | -| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | -| 11:455--601. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the -one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat -markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a7106a2db9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibentry.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \bibentry Markup | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation:ã|\bieã% - -Parameters:ã|noneã% - -Description: The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a -bibliography with a vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging -paragraph. - -Example: - - \bibliography{Bibliography} - ã|\bibentryã% - Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's - Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601. - ã|\bibentryã% - \sameauthor - 1978. ''Pet rocks astherapy tools.'' - {\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. - ã|\bibentryã% - Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\itGravel and Nothingness: - An Existential Theory}. Dayton:Gabbro Press. - \par - - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Bibliography | -| | -| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | -| Truth. 11:455--601. | -| 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. | -| 10:71--78. | -| | -| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | -| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - -ã|Notes:ã%The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an - error results. - - You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one - quotation is the same as the previous author. - - To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use - the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the - \bibliography markup was done using \frenchspacing. - - If you need to print yourbibliography with a format different than - the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the - \bibliographyformat markup. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index d8d0303319..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliog.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|BIBLIOGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\bibliographyformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 40eff62e82..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bibliogr.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| \bibliography{title} | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation:ã|\bibã% - -Parameters:ã|titleã% - -Description: The \bibliography markup starts the bibliography on a new -page, centers and prints the title in bold face, and enters the title -in the table of contents. - - Example: - ã|\bibliography{ã%Referencesã|}ã% - \frenchspacing - \bibentry - Grabens, Gruss M. 1970.{\it Mechanical Processes - in the Human Geomechanism}.Winston: Geomedical - Publications, International. - \bibentry - Illite, Ivan. 1911. ''Pickingthe Philosopher's - Stone.'' {\it Mining Truth}.11:455--601. - \par - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| References | -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | -| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|Notes:ã%If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than - the one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the - \bibliographyformat markup. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| \bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} | -| \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject | -| \cl{\twelvept\bd \bibtitle} | -| \vs{\bl}} | -| \everybibentry{\vs \bl}\goodbreak\hp\nin} | -| \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex | -| depth-.5ex}} | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------| - -Abbreviation:ã|\bifã% - -Parameters: submarkup - -Submarkup: \incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry, \sameauthorrulesize - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index cda2435221..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bie.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bibentry | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bieã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bibentry markup is used to separate each entry in a bibliography with a -vertical skip; an entry is in the form of a hanging paragraph. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\bibliography{Bibliography} -\bibentry -Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's -Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. -\bibentry -\sameauthor - -1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." -{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. -\bibentry -Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. {\it Gravel and Nothingness: -An Existential Theory}. Dayton: Gabbro Press. -\par -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Bibliography | -| | -| Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | -| 11:455--601. | -| | -| ....1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. | -| | -| Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential Theory. | -| Dayton: Gabbro Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The series is ended with a \par markup. Without the \par an error results. - You may use the \sameauthor markup to indicate that the author of one -citation is the same as the previous author. - To disable the double spacing which normally follows punctuation, use -the \frenchspacing markup. The example illustrated for the \bibliography -markup was done using \frenchspacing. - If you need to print your bibliography with a format different than the -one illustrated above, refer to the discussion of the \bibliographyformat -markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 2cbb983d68..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bif.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,248 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bibliographyformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bifã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\incontents, \titleformat, \everybibentry, -\sameauthorrulesizeã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bibliographyformat markup controls the style of the entire -bibliography. The following submarkup is only valid within \bif. - -\incontents by default adds the title text to the contents. The default is -yes; to keep the title from appearing enter "no": - -\bibliographyformat{\incontents{no}} - -\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the format of the bibliography title. -The default skips to a new page, centers the title in bold, and skips one -line. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline -within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or -outside of \bibliographyformat: - - * \bibtitleprints the title entered with the \bibliography markup. - -\everybibentry{Nested Markup} controls the format of each bibliographic -entry. The default permits breaking between entries and creates a hanging -paragraph for the entry. You may use markup such as \verticalspace, -\hangingparagraph, \item, \goodbreak, \noindent, \label, \leftindent within -\everybibentry as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside -of \bibliographyformat: - - * \bibnumberprints the current \bibentry number. - -\sameauthorrulesize sets the height, width, and depth of a horizontal line -used to indicate a repeat of an author's name. - - ã|Example:ã% -The following markup produces entries similar to the default but numbered. -A period and a tie (tilde, for a connecting space) join the number to the -text. - -\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} - \titleformat{\np - \cl{\bd \bibtitle} - - \vs{\bl} - } - \everybibentry{\goodbreak\hp\nin\bibnumber.~} - \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex} -} - -Then when you use \bibentry, you would get: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | -| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| 2. Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining Truth. | -| 11:455--601. | -| 3. Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." Geopsychology | -| Today. 10:71--78. | -| 4. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | -| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This example also numbers entries, but it uses labels instead of hanging -paragraphs. The \labelformat is changed under \titleformat to accommodate -numbers. This layout is useful for bibliographies that use identifiers in -place of numbers. - -\bibliographyformat{\incontents{yes} - \titleformat{\np\vsk{1in} - \cl{\bd \bibtitle} - \vs{\bl} - \labelformat{\labelwidth{22pt}}} - \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{\bibnumber}} - \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} - -Then when you use \bibliography, you would get: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| References | -| | -| 1. Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | -| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -| 2. Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | -| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -You can specify in the \everybibentry markup that the bibentry number is to -be surrounded by parenthesis or square brackets. - \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label{(\bibnumber)}} -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| References | -| | -| (1) Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | -| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -| (2) Salt, Jean-Paul. 1958. Gravel and Nothingness: An Existential | -| Theory. Dayton: Gabbro Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -You could also use \label to indicate citations that carry an alphanumeric -label by omitting the parameter to \label in the \everybibentry markup. - -\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle} - \vs{\bl} - \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}} - \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label} - \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} - -Then use the \bibentry markup as though it had a parameter: - -\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing -\bibentry {Grabe70} -Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes -in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications, International. -\bibentry{Illit11} -Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's - -Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. -\bibentry{Morai78} -Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." -{\it Geopsychology Today}. 10:71--78. - -and the citations will look like: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Citations | -| | -| Grabe70 Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human | -| Geomechanism. Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -| Illit11 Illite, Ivan. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's Stone." Mining | -| Truth. 11:455--601. | -| | -| Morai78 Moraine, Esker. 1978. "Pet rocks as therapy tools." | -| Geopsychology Today. 10:71--78. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -Another popular style groups all of an author's citations together. This -can be accomplished in a similar manner as previously defined. The -difference being that the \rt markup is used. - -\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\vsk{1in} - \cl{\bd \bibtitle} - \vs{\bl} - \labelformat{\labelwidth{50pt}}} - \everybibentry{\goodbreak\label} - \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} -\bibliography{Citations}\frenchspacing -\vs{.5\bl} -\nin OSBORNE, J.S. -\bie{\rt{1971.}} -{\it Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology}. Boston, Ma: -Addison-Wesley Pub. Co. -\bie{\rt{1978.}} -A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes. - -Pages 160--169 in {\it Cultural Anthropology}. -M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. -\vs{.5\bl} -\nin OTTEN, C.M. -\bibentry{\rt{1971.}} -{\it Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural -Aesthetics}. Garden City, N.Y.: -The Natural History Press. - -and the citations will look like: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Citations | -| | -| OSBORNE, J.S. | -| | -| 1971. Introduction to Aesthetic Anthropology. Boston, Ma: Addison-Wesley | -| Pub. Co. | -| | -| 1978. A survey of tribal masks used by Brazilian tribes. Pages 160--169 | -| in Cultural Anthropology. M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: | -| Harper and Row. | -| OTTEN, C.M. | -| | -| 1971. Anthropology and Art: Readings in Cross Cultural Aesthetics. | -| Garden City, N.Y.: The Natural History Press. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This final style makes use of an \everybibentry similar to the default. In -this example, the paragraph and hanging indents are set to different values -(by default they are equal). The other difference is that \noindent is -omitted. - -\bibliographyformat{\titleformat{\np\cl{\bd \bibtitle} - \vs{\bl} - \psk{\bl}\pin{10pt}\hin{20pt}} - \everybibentry{\par\goodbreak\hp\indent} - \sameauthorrulesize{width3em height.6ex depth-.5ex}} -\bibliography{Bibliography}\frenchspacing -\vs{\bl} \nin Asher67 -\bie -Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967.\linebreak -Dessensitization {\it in vitro}. {\it Immunology}. -13:469. {\it Cultural Anthropology}. M. Zateh and -F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. -\vs{\bl} -\nin Cinad68 - -\bie -Cinader, B., editor. 1968.\lbr -Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas, -Publisher, Springfield, Ill. - -and the citations will look like: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Bibliography | -| | -| Asher67 | -| Asherson, G. L., and S. H. Stone. 1967. | -| Dessensitization in vitro. Immunology. 13:469. Cultural Anthropology. | -| M. Zateh and F. Grange, eds. New York: Harper and Row. | -| | -| Cinad68 | -| Cinader, B., editor. 1968. | -| Regulation of the Antibody Response. Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, | -| Springfield, Ill. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \bibliographyformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if -both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu deleted file mode 100644 index d635af3511..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bothpage.helpmenu +++ /dev/null @@ -1,12 +0,0 @@ - Menu for BOTHPAGES Commands -- TEXT1 - -A file may be selected for viewing by placing the cursor under any character -of the file wanted and pressing the PF 1 key. A MENU file is indicated when -a name is preceded by an asterisk (*). If you are using a terminal that -doesn't have a CURSOR or PF KEYS then you MUST TYPE in the COMPLETE HELP -COMMAND with operands and options. For a description of the operands and -options type HELP HELP. - - -runningheadformat (running top title options) -runningfootformat (running bottom title options) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage deleted file mode 100644 index d9ee022c0d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomma.helppage +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \bottommargin (\bma) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \bottommargin (\bma) command will set the distance from the bottom of the -page to the last line of the text. This command has the format: - - \bottommargin{uu} - -where "uu" is any unit of TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.) or number of -lines. The default bottom margin is one inch, or \bottommargin{1IN}. This -command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input file before any -actual text is entered. - -In order to change the bottom margin from the default of one inch to one-half -inch, you would enter: - - \bma{.5in} - -Which would give you one-half inch between the last line of text on the page -and the bottom of the page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth deleted file mode 100644 index ae217363f6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpboth +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after -the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the -\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) -commands. This command has the format: - - \bothpages{ - \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} - }} - -where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the -bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and -"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle -line. For example: - - \runningtitleformat{\bothpages{ - \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} - }} - -will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and -put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the -current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the -bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this: - -Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven deleted file mode 100644 index a8c4432f10..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpeven +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after -the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the -\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) -commands. This command has the format: - - \evenpages{ - \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} - }} - -where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the -bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and -"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle -line on all even pages. For example: - - \runningtitleformat{\evenpages{ - \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} - }} - -will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and -put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the -current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the -bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 4 would look like this: - -Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp deleted file mode 100644 index 949dd41432..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bottomti.helpoddp +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \bottomtitle COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \bottomtitle command sets what will appear at the bottom of each page after -the title page. The \bottomtitle command is always used in conjunction with the -\runningtitleformat and \bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) -commands. This command has the format: - - \oddpages{ - \bottomtitle{\line{\lft{llll}\ctr{cccc}\rt{rrrr}} - }} - -where "llll" is the information to be printed to the far left of the -bottomtitle line; "cccc" is the information to be printed in the center; and -"rrrr" is the information to be printed to the far right of the bottomtitle -line on all odd pages. For example: - - \runningtitleformat{\oddpages{ - \bottomtitle\line{\lft{Joe Smith}\ctr{June 3, 1984}\rt{\pagenumber}} - }} - -will space down to leave the amount specified on the \bottommargin command and -put "Joe Smith" at the bottom far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the -current page number on the bottom far right of the first line of the -bottomtitle. The running bottomtitle of page 5 would look like this: - -Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index afd01a8162..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqb.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| blockquotebegin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bqbã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \blockquotebegin markup ends a paragraph and forces the following text -into a quote format, indicated by a change in the size of type to 10pt, 6 -points of spacing before and after the quote, and margin indentations of 24 -points. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Salt (1958) names the process: -\blockquotebegin -This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. -Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it - -can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. -\paragraph -The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles -over time. -The process is one-way, as rehydration will not -unwrinkle the surface. -\blockquoteend -As far as general surface alteration, only the -time scale differs between the human . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Salt (1958) names the process: | -| | -| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most | -| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in | -| forms in trenchcoats. | -| The lithosphere---dermosphere in humans---wrinkles over | -| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle | -| the surface. | -| | -| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs | -| between the human . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Every \blockquotebegin must have a matching \blockquoteend. If the quote is -not ended with \blockquoteend, all following text is formatted as a block -quote, and a warning message appears at the end of formatting which says: - -(\end occurred inside a group at level 1) -Output written on TEXT1$$.dvi (1 page, 436 bytes). -Transcript written on TEXT1$$.texlog. - - The defaults for \blockquotebegin differ when you are using \monospace. -With \monospace, there is no font change, one line is skipped before and -after the block quote, and the left and right indentations are both 1 2 -inch. - Refer to the \blockquoteformat for instructions on how to change the -block quote style. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c10fddc23b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqe.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| blockquoteend | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bqeã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \blockquoteend markup ends the quote and returns text to the normal -margins and sizes. Text following is formatted as a new paragraph. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Salt (1958) names the process: -\blockquotebegin -\rightragged -This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. -Most metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it -can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. - -\paragraph -The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans --- -wrinkles over time. -The process is one-way, as rehydration will not -unwrinkle the surface. -\blockquoteend -As far as general surface alteration, only the -time scale differs between the human . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Salt (1958) names the process: | -| | -| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most | -| metamorphosis occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in | -| forms in trenchcoats. | -| The lithosphere --- dermosphere in humans --- wrinkles over | -| time. The process is one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle | -| the surface. | -| | -| As far as general surface alteration, only the time scale differs | -| between the human . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fdae8155cc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bqf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| blockquoteformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bqfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everyblockquote, \skipafterã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \blockquoteformat markup controls the formatting of block quotes. The -following submarkup are effective only within block quotes. - -\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -\everyblockquote{Nested Markup} determines how the text of the quote is -formatted. You can specify justification or raggedness, single or double -spacing, left or right indentation, paragraph spacing and indentation, and -any font change needed within block quotes. You may use any markup such as -\tenpt, \interlineskip, \leftindent or \rightindent within \everyblockquote. - -\skipafter indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - - ã|Example:ã% -The indentation has been changed in this sample. The text for the block -quote is to be printed right ragged in 9 point Computer Modern. Paragraphs -within the block quote, and only within, have a 1 pica paragraph indent and -zero paragraph skip. The skips before and after the quotation have been set -to zero. - -\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt} - \everyblockquote{\pin{1pc}\psk{0pt}\ninepoint - \leftindent{1pc}\rightindent{1pc}\rr} - \skipafter{0pt}} - -The example illustrated for \blockquotebegin would then begin: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Salt (1958) names the process: | -| | -| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis | -| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in | -| trenchcoats. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This sample is printed with a small interlineskip, normal paragraph values -and zero indentation. The text is in 9 point italics with an interlineskip -of 9.5 points. - -\blockquoteformat{\skipbefore{0pt} - \everyblockquote{\ssp\ninept\it\isk{9.5pt} - \leftindent{0pt}\rightindent{0pt}} - \skipafter{0pt}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Salt (1958) names the process: | -| | -| This loss of fluids and cooling is known as aging. Most metamorphosis | -| occurs in ocean trenches, but it can also occur in forms in trenchcoats. | -| | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \blockquoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. - The defaults for \blockquoteformat when using \monospace are different. -The space before and after is one blank line (1\bl), the left and right -indents are 36 points ( 1 2 inch), and the text is in the roman font since -you cannot print \tenpt with \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 605bacc116..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|BQUOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\blockquoteformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 879bbe76b8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bquotep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|BQUOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\blockquoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 96925e779d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/break.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| break | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -If you want to force TEXT1 to break between lines at a certain point in the -middle of a paragraph use the markup \break. - - ã|Example:ã% - -To everything there is a season, and a time -to every purpose under the -heaven: A time to be born, and a time to -pluck up {\it that which is}\break -planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal; -a time to break down, and -a time to build up; A time to weep, -and a time to laugh; - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| To everything there is a season, and a time to every purpose under | -| the heaven: A time to be born, and a time to pluck up that which is | -| planted; A time to kill, and a time to heal; a time to break down, and a | -| time to build up; A time to weep, and a time to laugh; | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -To avoid having the white space between the words as is illustrated in the -third line in the above example, use the \linebreak markup. - For more on the \break markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index b4b0c741fd..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitle.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat -command and will set options for the subheadc titles. The format for the -\titleformat command is: - - \subheadcformat{\titleformat{ - \vsk{24pt} - {\subheadctitle} - \vs{12pt}} - } - -This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadc command will space down 24 -points, print the \subheadctitle and space down 12 points to resume with the -text. - -For more information on the \subheadctitle command, see the help screen under -the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index f51b183132..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/btitlef.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \titleformat COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \titleformat command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat -command and will set options for the subheadd titles. The format for the -\titleformat command is: - - \subheaddformat{\titleformat{ - {\it \subheaddtitle:} - } - -This is the default for \titleformat. Each \subheadd command will start a new -paragraph, print the \subheaddtitle in italics followed by a colon and then -resume with the text. - -For more information on the \subheaddtitle command, see the help screen under -the markup menu for that particular command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 03d57913d3..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/bul.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| bullet | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\bulã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \bullet markup produces a raised centered dot as an identifier for an -item in a list. - - ã|Example:ã% - -the following necessary trace elements: -\listbegin -\bul Copper -\bul Manganese -\bul Selenium -\bul Zinc -\listend - -\nin The mineral content of the body . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| the following necessary trace elements: | -| * Copper | -| * Manganese | -| * Selenium | -| * Zinc | -| The mineral content of the body . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -A list of bullets must be placed within the \listbegin and \listend markup. -The bullets are indented 5 characters, like the first level of an ordered -list. Bullets may also be used in outline lists where they are indented -5 characters from the previous level by default. Refer to the \listformat -markup to change the amount of indentation. - - When in math mode, the \bullet markup is used in the same fashion as -described in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 29255b1074..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| caps | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ccã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \caps markup sets the typeface to "caps/small caps". - - ã|Example:ã% -This example changes "Parallels" to caps/small caps. It is changed back -with the \roman markup. - -lowest common denominator. -\par -\nin\caps Parallels. \roman Consider for a -moment rocks and deer . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| lowest common denominator. | -| Parallels. Consider for a moment rocks and deer . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Caps/small caps are often used for display titles or special emphasis. It -should not be used for the body of text. Not all font sets have small -caps available. Those font sets that do not have small caps will give the -following warning message when you try to use \caps or \cc: - -<TEXT1> Warning. No small caps font in CMSAN8. Will print roman font .) diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index ac5118d383..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cents.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| cents | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to print a cent sign. - - ã|Example:ã% -This machine takes 35\cents\ instead of 25\cents. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| This machine takes 35c instead of 25c. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \cents markup must be followed either by a backslash-space, or by a -tilde (~). diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 51aba6b4c6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chap.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| chapter | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\chapã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \chapter markup starts a new page, centers the title in bold face, -and enters it in the table of contents. The text of a title is the only -parameter. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Anything less is more realistic. -\par -\chapter{Nationalism} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that nationalism aims solely . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter 1 | -| Nationalism | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| nationalism aims solely . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want to force TEXT1 to split a long chapter title at a place of your -choosing, use \linebreak. - -\chapter{Subject Index\linebreak -and\lbr -Concordance} -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter 1 | -| Subject Index | -| and | -| Concordance | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to \chapterformat on the next page to change the chapter style. - Each time you use \chapter it resets the subhead numbers to zero. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index e801d05132..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chapter.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|CHAPTERã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\chapterformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c20cd7f815..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| chapterformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes}} - -Abbreviation: ã|\chfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \chapterformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that controls -the appearance of the chapter title. The submarkup is described. - -\numberingstyle allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the -default, to letters {A} or roman numerals {I}. - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{A}} - -\titleformat{Nested Markup} controls the appearance of the chapter title -banner. You may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \center- -line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within -or outside of \chapterformat: - - * \chapternumberprints the most recent chapter number. - - * \chaptertitleprints the most recent chapter title. - -\incontents places the chapter title in contents (if one is printed). -Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." - -\chapterformat{\incontents{no}} - - ã|Example:ã% -When you enter, - -\chapter{Introduction} - -you get the default chapter style which looks like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter 1 | -| Introduction | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -In the following example this default style has been modified such that each -chapter starts on a new page, the title is centered in bold (no chapter -number printed), and one line is skipped after the chapter title. - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - - \titleformat{\newpage - \cl{\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl}} - \incontents{yes}} - -Then each time you specify \chapter you will get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Introduction | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -In this sample, each chapter title is prefaced by the chapter number. As -before, the title is centered in bold, and one line is skipped before text. - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\newpage - \cl{\bd\chapternumber.~\chaptertitle} - - \vs{1\bl}} - \incontents{yes}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. Introduction | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \chapterformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes deleted file mode 100644 index 55451d7c10..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/chrono.changes +++ /dev/null @@ -1,3 +0,0 @@ -6/22/90: - -1) removed filemana.helpmark diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index 1f487912fe..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincon.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheadcformat -command and will determine whether subheadc titles are included in the Table of -Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: - - \subheadcformat{ - \incontents{yes} - } - -By default, the subheadc titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. -If you want the subheadc titles included in the Table of Contents, enter -\incontents{yes} within the \subheadcformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh deleted file mode 100644 index b6061267cc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cincont.helpsubh +++ /dev/null @@ -1,15 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \incontents COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \incontents command is always used in conjunction with the \subheaddformat -command and will determine whether subheadd titles are included in the Table of -Contents. The format for the \incontents command is: - - \subheaddformat{ - \incontents{no} - } - -By default, the subheadd titles will not be included in the Table of Contents. -If you want the subheadd titles included in the Table of Contents, enter -\incontents{yes} within the \subheaddformat command. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 67836f2dfe..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cl.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| centerline | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\clã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \centerline markup ends the previous paragraph and places equal blank -spaces on both sides of a word or phrase on a single line. This markup is -useful for titles and emphasis. The only parameter for this markup is the -text to be centered. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\centerline{SOCIOGEOLOGY\lbr -Minerals and Human Behavior} -\vs{12pt} -\centerline{by Achilles Chert} -\vs{24pt} - -"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| SOCIOGEOLOGY | -| Minerals and Human Behavior | -| | -| by Achilles Chert | -| | -| | -| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You may use \linebreak within \centerline. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index e4216ca42c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/clb.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| centerlinesbegin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\clbã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \centerlinesbegin markup ends the previous paragraph and starts a series -of centered lines. This markup is useful for titles and emphasis. There -are no parameters. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\centerlinesbegin -SOCIOGEOLOGY -Minerals and Human Behavior -\vs{18pt} -Achilles Chert - -\centerlinesend -\vs{24pt} -"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| SOCIOGEOLOGY | -| Minerals and Human Behavior | -| | -| | -| Achilles Chert | -| | -| | -| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each \centerlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \centerlinesend. - - You can also use \centerlinesbegin before a \drawbox or \paragraphbox, -but not within either markup. - You cannot use \centerlinesbegin within any of the following markup: -\appendix, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, -\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, -\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, -\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\centerlinesbegin -\paragraphbox{John H. Whalley -{\it publishing vice president} -\vs{\bl} -John B. Dykeman -{\it associate publisher}} -\centerlinesend - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| John H. Whalley | -| publishing vice president | -| | -| John B. Dykeman | -| associate publisher | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index bd7f8b0633..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/cle.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| centerlinesend | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\cleã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \centerlinesend markup ends a series of centered lines and returns to a -paragraph mode. There are no parameters. - - ã|Example:ã% - -The prerequisites to operate this hardware are: -\vs{2\bl} -\clb -6085 Professional Computer System -ViewPoint Software -VP Document Editor Software -Signed Software License Agreement - -\cle - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The prerequisites to operate this hardware are: | -| | -| | -| 6085 Professional Computer System | -| ViewPoint Software | -| VP Document Editor Software | -| Signed Software License Agreement | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 0c9c11c617..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/contents.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|CONTENTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\tableofcontentsformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 0dc940202f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/coul.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| countinglines | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\coulã% - -Parameters: ã|statusã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to start counting lines for line numbering in the margin -of a document. Status is true or false. - - ã|Example:ã% -To start line numbering you enter - -\countinglines{true} - - ã|Notes:ã% - -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3cd7e700ae..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/db.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| drawbox | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\dbã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -A box is a grouping of rules into a square or rectangle. You can draw a box -with the \drawbox markup. The parameter for this markup is the material to -be put inside the box. Any grouping less than a paragraph can be boxed, -including letters, sentences, figures, or tables. - - ã|Example:ã% -To draw a box around an "a", you would enter: - -Draw a box around \drawbox{a} -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ..... | -| Draw a box around . . | -| ..... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want to draw an empty 1 inch square (plus the box "rule size" and -"mat size") you could enter, - -\db{\vrule width 0pt height 1in -\vrule width 1in height 0pt depth 0pt} - .............. - . . - . . - . . - . . - . . - . . -which prints: .............. - - ã|Notes:ã% -Do not use this markup with \monospace or around \settabs or \halign. - Paragraphs cannot be boxed with \drawbox unless each one is put in a -vertical box (see \vbox). Use the \paragraphbox markup instead. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 46df8d2cf9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbm.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| drawboxmat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\dbmã% - -Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \drawboxmat markup determines the amount of space between the rule and -the text. This is the area that has been shaded in the illustration at the -bottom of the page. This space is used with the \drawbox and \paragraphbox -markup. The default is 3 points. - - ã|Example:ã% -\drawboxmat{20pt} -Draw a box around \drawbox{a} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ......... | -| . . | -| . a . | -| . . | -| Draw a box around ......... | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 88a1713cba..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dbrs.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| drawboxrulesize | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\dbrsã% - -Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \drawboxrulesize markup determines the thickness of the rule that makes -up the box itself. The default is .4 point. This rule thickness is used by -both \drawbox and \paragraphbox. - - ã|Example:ã% -\drawboxrulesize{2pt} -Draw a box around \drawbox{a} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ..... | -| . a . | -| Draw a box around ..... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 9278cca2bd..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/die.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| dumpinsertseject | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\dieã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to dump (print) all accumulated figures and tables -(inserts) entered with \figure, \topinsert or \midinsert. After printing -the figures and other inserts, a new page is started. If no inserts had -been accumulated, a new page is still started. This markup appears in many -of the format markup, such as \chapterformat. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0} - } - \incontents{yes} - } - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \topinsert and \midinsert markup are discussed in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index f9f2cbc586..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/dsp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| doublespace | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\dspã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The doublespace markup leaves alternate line spaces blank. This markup -causes a break in text. There are no parameters. Double spacing will be in -effect until changed with a \singlespace markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -\singlespace -All things considered, Camus has derived -a solid conglomerate of grail theories -for us. -\doublespace - -Let me close with another penetrating insight from -Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, -because of the inevitability of entropic direction. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| All things considered, Camus has derived a solid conglomerate of grail | -| theories for us. | -| | -| Let me close with another penetrating insight from Camus: The rock | -| | -| should be left at the bottom, because of the inevitability of entropic | -| | -| direction. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 349690ca9b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/el.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| ellipsis | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\elã% - -Parameters: ã|nã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Ellipsis points indicate any omission of a word, line, or paragraph from -a quoted passage. Three points are used when the omission occurs with a -sentence or fragment. Four points are used when the omission is a whole -sentence or more, including whole paragraphs. - In using the \ellipsis markup, n may be "3" or "4". The \ellipsis3 -markup inserts three points, surrounded by appropriate spacing. ( . . . -) The \ellipsis4 markup inserts four points, immediately after a sentence, -with space after the last point. ( . . . . ) - - ã|Example:ã% -The following quote has been shortened with ellipses. - -names the process: -\blockquotebegin -This loss of fluids is known as aging\ellipsis4 -The lithosphere\ellipsis3 wrinkles over time. -The process is one-way, as rehydration will not -unwrinkle the surface. -\blockquoteend -As far as general surface alteration, only the . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| names the process: | -| | -| This loss of fluids is known as aging . . . . The | -| lithosphere . . . wrinkles over time. The process is | -| one-way, as rehydration will not unwrinkle the surface. | -| | -| As far as general surface alteration, only the . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -No additional space is required around the ellipsis markup, since space is -included. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4faefbc558..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| endnoteformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{4pt} - \textreferenceposition{down} - \textreferencefont{\rm} - \textreferencestyle{[1]} - \notereferenceposition{down} - \notereferencefont{\tenpt} - \notereferencestyle{1.} - \notereferencegutter{1em} - \everyendnote{\tenpt\pin{0pt}\lin{1.2em}}} - -Abbreviation: ã|\enfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \textreferenceposition, -\textreferencefont, \textreferencestyle, \notereferenceposition, \noterefer- -encefont, \notereferencestyle, \notereferencegutter, \everyendnoteã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \endnoteformat markup allows you to modify the shape and presentation of -endnotes generated with \autoendnote. - -\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -\textreferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is -superscripted or not. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If -you want the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the -parameter to "up". - -\textreferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the -endnote reference number is always printed in the standard font. - -\textreferencestyle determines the numbering style at the end of a chapter -or the end of the document (wherever the \printendnotes appears). There are -five possible values: - 1. "1" for numbered endnotes - 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses - 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets - 4. "a" for lettered endnotes - 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses -The default is Arabic numerals in square brackets. - -\notereferenceposition determines if the endnote reference number is -superscripted or not when it is printed at the end of a chapter or the end -of a document. By default, the reference is not superscripted. If you want -the endnote reference number to be superscripted, then change the parameter -to "up". - -\notereferencefont lets you change the face or size. By default the -endnote reference number printed at the end of a chapter (or end of a -document, wherever \printendnotes occurs) is always printed in the standard -font. - -\notereferencestyle determines the numbering style. There are five -possible values: - 1. "1." for numbered endnotes - 2. "(1)" for numbered endnotes with parentheses - 3. "[1]" for numbered endnotes with square brackets - 4. "a" for lettered endnotes - 5. "(a)" for lettered endnotes with parentheses -The default is numbered endnotes. - -\notereferencegutter specifies the amount of space between the endnote -number and the endnote text. The gutter is illustrated here as the shaded -portion between "1." and "The first step": -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ... | -| 1....The first step . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\everyendnote lets you modify the shape of the notes. You can change the -type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left indentation. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example shows an endnote style with a superscripted endnote number; the -body of the endnote in a 9 point Computer Modern set; the endnote at the end -of the document (or chapter) indented half an inch from the left and half an -inch from the right of the rest of the body of the text; the endnote body -right ragged; and the text of the document right justified and in 10 point - -Computer Modern. The endnote "text" reference at the end of the chapter -will retain the default style ("1." not superscripted). - Note that 9 point was specified within both the "notereferencefont" and -"everyendnote" markups. The "notereferencefont" determines the font that -the endnote reference number is to be printed in. The "everyendnote" markup -determines the font that the endnote text is to print in at the end of the -document or end of chapter, wherever the next \printendnotes markup appears. - -\endnoteformat{\skipbefore{12pt} - \textreferenceposition{up} - \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} - \textreferencestyle{1} - \notereferenceposition{down} - \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} - \notereferencestyle{1.} - \everyendnote{\rightragged - \pin{0pt}\psk{12pt}\ninepoint - \leftindent{.5in}\rightindent{.5in}} - } - - -| . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater | -than the font size.\autoendnote{This extra space is -referred to as leading.} The default font size is . . . - -The endnote in the document would look like: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| . . . automatically sets an interline skip 2 points greater than the | -| font size. The default font size is . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -The endnote printed after the \printendnotes markup would look like: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. This extra space is referred to as leading. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \endnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 8afb34d2bf..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|ENOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\endnoteformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 2c37af8a98..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/enotep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|ENOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\endnoteformat and if you areã|noteã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4dae99a110..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ep.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,38 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| emptypage | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\epã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \emptypage markup advances the page count, leaving an "empty" page, -which can be placed with custom figures or diagrams. There is no break in -text. There are no parameters for this markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -To float an empty page, enter the sequence: -same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page). -\par -\emptypage -This suggests parallels in evolution. - -Generally speaking, there are three -possible solutions . . . - - ã|Example:ã% -To have an empty page print immediately between the sentence ending "page)." -and the one beginning "This suggests . . . " you would enter follow the -\emptypage with a \newpage: -same proportions (Figure 2, on the following page). -\par -\emptypage -\newpage -This suggests parallels in evolution. -Generally speaking, there are three -possible solutions . . . - - ã|Notes:ã% -Unlike \newpage, if you enter two \emptypage markup in a row, you will get -two empty pages when the page is ejected. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3e9165e6a9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/epm.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| evenpagemargin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\epmã% - -Parameters: ã|measurementã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be -printed on even pages. The default is 50.8 points from the left edge on -even pages. - - ã|Example:ã% -To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left -edge you would enter at the beginning of your document: - -\evenpagemargin{1in} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. - Valid values for \evenpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the 32d power points, -practical values are 5-860 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index e56dd2f3e7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ex.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| extension | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\exã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \extension markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Extension -face. Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the -characters available in the Extension face. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example uses \extension to print an "O dot": - -Put a {\extension\char'113} next to . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Put a K next to . . . | -| | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 049452e975..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fif.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| figureformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\figureformat{\skipbefore{1\bl} - \position{\float} - \titleformat{\bqb\hp\tenpt - \bd Figure \figurenumber. - \rm\figuretitle \bqe} - \incontents{yes} - \skipafter{1\bl} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\fifã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \position, \titleformat, -\incontents, \skipafterã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \figureformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the -appearance of the figure. The submarkup is described. - -ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -figure block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -ã|\positionã% By default, text is floated around a figure and the figure -printed at the top of the next page if not enough room remains on the -current page to print the figure. If you do not want text to float around -the figure, and you want the figure to print exactly where you place it, use -\position{\nofloat}. - -\figureformat{\position{\nofloat}} - -ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the figure title. -You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical- -space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup -you may use within or outside of \figureformat: - - * \figurenumberprints the most recent figure number. - - * \figuretitleprints the most recent figure title. - -ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing the -figure title. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -ã|\incontentsã% places the figure title in contents (if one is printed). -Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." - - ã|Example:ã% -The amount of space skipped before and after has been reduced to 6 points -(half a line with 12 point interline space), the figure number is placed in -\label and the figure title is printed in italics. - -\figureformat{\skipbefore{6pt} - \titleformat{\label{\bd Figure \figurenumber.} - \it\figuretitle} - \skipafter{6pt} - \incontents{yes} - } - -\figure{\halign{\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr -July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr -32&67&44&47&18\cr}{Size data of a Yellow - -Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, -1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 | -| 32 67 44 47 18 | -| | -| Figure 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the period of | -| July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \figureformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is - -that the figure title is printed in the roman \monospace font instead of -\tenpt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index be6fe909ea..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fig.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| figure | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\figã% - -Parameters: ã|first parameter = markup - second parameter = the figure titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -A figure is a representation or illustration. The \figure markup can leave -space for a figure, number it, print the figure title, and ensure that the -title gets placed in the contents. The figure markup has two parameters: -markup and the title of the figure. - The "markup" can be a \verticalspace markup, \fullpage, \halfpage, or -text such as a table, etc. The "title" is the title of the figure which -will print at the bottom of the figure and in the table of contents. - If you want a figure on an entire page, enter \fullpage as the first -parameter. If you want a figure to fill half of the page, enter \halfpage -as the first parameter. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want to use \asisbegin, it must go outside of the figure and the -title cannot be more than one line long. - -\aib -\figure{\tt - clay - Human - pressure - parent rock - temperature -}{Origin of the Stone Species} -\aie - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| clay | -| Human | -| pressure | -| parent rock | -| temperature | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| Figure 1. Origin of the Stone Species | -| | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This figure leaves half an inch of space above the title, "Size data of a -| . . ". | - -the same proportions. -\db{\figure{\vs{.5in}}{Size data of a Yellow -Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, -1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} -This suggests parallels . . . } - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| Figure 2. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the | -| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This figure leaves an entire empty page for the figure. The title would -print at the bottom of the figure. - -the same proportions. -\figure{\fullpage}{Origins of the Human Species} -This suggests parallels . . . - - ã|Example:ã% -This figure leaves a half page empth for the figure. The title would print -at the bottom of the figure. - -the same proportions. -\figure{\halfpage}{Origins of the Human Species} -This suggests parallels . . . - - ã|Notes:ã% - -By default, text "floated" is text that is moved in front of a figure. The -figure is moved to the top of the current page if there is room left. If -not enough room remains, then the figure is printed at the top of the next -page. To disable this floating process, refer to the \figureformat markup. - For both \halfpage and \fullpage, the figure title is included in -determining how much space to leave. - By default, each new \part will start numbering figures over again at 1. -Use \setfigurenumber to reset the figurenumber outside of parts. - When figures are using the default "float" method of placing figures, -you cannot use \twocolumns or \threecolumns in parameter 1. If you -are using the \nofloat option specified in \figureformat you may use the -multiple column specifications. - Use the \figureformat markup to modify the figure style. - You can not use \settabs within \figure. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index c9c8c14c17..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FIGURE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\figureformat and if you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index b8785b18b1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/figurep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FIGURE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\figureformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 15063d06b6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fixf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| fixedformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\fixfã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -TEXT1 offers two multiple column formats that have different text handling -capabilities. The normal (default) style is called "flexibleformat". This -is described with \twocolumns and \threecolumns markup. There is an -optional style you can use called "fixedformat." The flexible format can be -changed to the fixed format by inserting the markup \fixedformat before the -first two or three column markup appears. - The Fixed format makes each column act as if it were a single page. -Inserts and footnotes will appear in each column just as they would in the -single column format. Only the running head and running foot will print -across the full width of the page. - - ã|Notes:ã% - -Since each column is handled like a normal single column page, the columns -may not be balanced. A short right hand column will remain short when -formatting is completed. - The Fixed format cannot be used to format combinations of single, -double, and triple columns on the same page. The two column and three -column markup can be used in conjunction with one another, but not on the -same page. If both format markup appear on the same page, TEXT1 will fill -the bottom of the current column on the current page with white space and -change to the new format on the following page. - Once the fixed format has been specified, it will remain in force for -the remainder of the document. The Fixed format cannot be changed to the -Flexible format again within the same document. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a1d3bd0491..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| footnoteformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{12pt} - \skipafterdivider{2.6pt} - \footnotedivider{144pt} - \textreferenceposition{up} - \textreferenceplacement{after} - \textreferencefont{\tenpt} - \textreferencestyle{1} - \notereferenceposition{down} - \notereferencefont{\tenpt} - \notereferencestyle{1.} - \notereferencegutter{1em} - \everyfootnote{\tenpt\pin{20pt} - \lin{0pt}} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\fnfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbeforedivider, \skipafterdivider, -\footnotedivider, \textreferenceposition, -\textreferenceplacement, \textreferencefont, -\textreferencestyle, \textreferencegutter, -\everyfootnote, \notereferenceposition, -\notereferencefont, \notereferencestyle, -\notereferencegutterã% - - ã|Description:ã% -To change the footnote style and any of the other footnote formatting -options of the \autofootnote markup, use the \footnoteformat markup. The -default footnote format is: - -ã|\skipbeforedividerã% determines the distance between the last line of text -on a page and the footnote divider rule which is printed just before the -footnotes. The default for this markup is 12 points. - -ã|\skipafterdividerã% determines the distance between the footnote divider rule -and the first footnote. The default for this markup is 2.5 points. - -ã|\footnotedividerã% determines the length of a short rule that separates the -footnotes from text. The default value is 144 points (2 inches). - -ã|\textreferencepositionã% determines if the footnote reference number is a -superscript or not. By default, the reference is superscripted (up). If -you want the footnote reference number to be on the baseline, change the -parameter to "down". The default for \monospace is "down". Do not change -it to "up" for \monospace. - -\textreferenceplacement determines if the footnote reference number -precedes or follows the word being noted. By default, the reference -will follow the noted word. If you want the footnote reference number to be -placed before the word being noted, then change the parameter to "before". - -ã|\textreferencefontã% lets you determine how to print the footnote number. -The default is the roman face at 10 point. For \monospace, the default is -the roman typewriter printer face. - -ã|\textreferencestyleã% determines the numbering style. There are four -possible values: - 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes - 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses - 3. "a" for lettered footnotes - 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses -The default is \textreferencestyle{1} for composing printers. Typewriter -printers using \monospace have a default of \textreferencestyle{(1)}. - -ã|\notereferencepositionã% determines whether the footnote reference number in -the note is a superscript or not. By default, the reference is on the -baseline. If you want the footnote reference number to be superscripted, -change the parameter to "up". Do note specify "up" for typewriter printers -using \monospace. - -ã|\notereferencefontã% lets you determine what font to print the footnote -number in. The default is standard face at 10 point. For \monospace, the -default is the roman typewriter printer face. - -ã|\notereferencestyleã% determines the numbering style for the notes. There -are four possible values: - 1. "1" for numbered superscripted footnotes - 2. "(1)" for numbered footnotes surrounded with parentheses - 3. "a" for lettered footnotes - 4. "(a)" for lettered footnotes surrounded with parentheses -The default is \textreferencestyle{1.}. - -\notereferencegutter sets the distance between the footnote number and the -first word of text of the note. The gutter is illustrated here as the -shaded portion between "1." and "The first step": - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| .... | -| 1....The first step . . . | -| .... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The default is one em space, \notereferencegutter{1em}. - -\everyfootnote{Nested Markup} sets the style for everyfootnote. You can -change the type face, the paragraph parameters, and the right and left -indentation. The default text size is 10 point; each note is in paragraph -format, with an indent of 20 points. Typewriter printers which must use -\monospace may not change to another font set. - - ã|Example:ã% -The following example uses a footnote style that prints a superscripted -footnote number in the text and the note, the body of the footnote in -nine-point Computer Modern set, the footnote at the bottom of the page -indented 36 points from the left and 36 points from the right of the rest of -the body of the text of the document, the footnote body right ragged, and -the text of the document right justified and in 10 point Computer Modern. -The \footnoteformat block is modified thus: - -\footnoteformat{\skipbeforedivider{18pt} - \footnotedivider{144pt} - \textreferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} - \notereferenceposition{up} - \notereferencefont{\ninepoint\rm} - \everyfootnote{\rightragged\pin{0pt} - \psk{12pt}\ninepoint - \leftindent{36pt}\rightindent{36pt}}} - -Note that \ninepoint was specified within both the \textreferencefont and -\everyfootnote markups. The \textreferencefont determines the font that the - -footnote reference number is to be printed in. The \everyfootnote markup -determines the font that the footnote text is to print in at the bottom -of the page. Most often the fonts specified in \textreferencefont and -\everyfootnote are the same font. - - ã|Notes:ã% -This markup modifies the style of the \autofootnote markup, not the -\footnote markup. - The \footnoteformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if -both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index caeff296f7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FNOTE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\footnoteformat and if you are using \monospace. This affects -how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index c0997c3c8f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fnotep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FNOTE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\footnoteformat and if you areã|notã%using \monospace. This affects -how \autofootnote prints, not how \footnote prints. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3d6b584379..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/font.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| font | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|user markup name and font nameã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \font markup can be used to allow you to make use of a specific font -available on your printer. You should always consult the font catalog for -the fonts available on your printer. The name given in the font catalog -goes where font name is with the \font markup. The user markup name you -must provide. It should be a unique name. - - ã|Example:ã% -To use the fourteen point Sonoran Roman, you can assign it to the markup -name \bigfont by entering, - -\font \bigfont = sonr14 - -\bigfont Palouse Region: - -and you will get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Palouse Region: | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -To use the ten point Computer Modern Sanserif Demibold Condensed you can -assign it to a markup name \demifont by entering, - -\font \demifont = cmssdc10 - -\demifont Palouse Region: - -you will get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Palouse Region: | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \font markup does not change the interline skip. A font established -with \selectspecificfont does. - This markup is described further in The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 16ef399cb3..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontm.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FONT-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default -\monospace font. You usually shoudn't have to do this. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index c39de10783..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/fontp.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|FONT-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default -proportional space font. You might want to do this if you want to have -a FONT-P TEXBLOCK on your own disk to be included for each job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b9135f7c0b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/footnote.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| footnote | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|first parameter = reference mark - second parameter = footnote textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \footnote markup can be used to create marked footnotes. There are two -parameters; the first is the reference mark, and the second is the text of -the note itself. Each parameter is surrounded with curly braces ({}). If -more than one reference mark is used on the same page, they should appear in -the prescribed order: - * asterisk (*) - * dagger (\dagger) - * double dagger (\ddagger) - * section sign (\S) -Refer to the example in the TEXT1 Users' Guide or Reference Manual for -real sample output. These characters are not available at your terminal. - - ã|Example:ã% -Using the above prescribed order, the second footnote on a page would be -entered with \footnote as: - -by Achilles Chert\footnote{\dagger}{pH.d., Litmus Sci. -The author is with the School of Pyroclastic -Philosophy at the University of Piedmont.}. -\par -\nin "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert -Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of -Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the -declivitous landmass. - -In the document, the text would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| by Achilles Chert . | -| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who | -| lionized the labors of Sisyphus in moving the igneous concretion up the | -| declivitous landmass. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -At the bottom of the page the footnote would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| pH.d., Litmus Sci. The author is with the School of Pyroclastic | -| Philosophy at the University of Piedmont. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \footnoteformat has no effect on \footnote. \footnoteformat is used to -change the style of the \autofootnote markup. - - You cannot use \footnote within \settabs, \vbox, \hbox, -\drawbox, \paragraphbox, \label, \part, \chapter, \centerline, \halign, -\rightlinesbegin, or \centerlinesbegin. - Refer to the The TEXbook for more on the \footnote markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index e46eaba641..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frac.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| fraction | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\fracã% - -Parameters: ã|numerator/denominatorã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \fraction markup is another method of specifying a fraction. If you -enter "@1\over2@" you get " 1 2 ". Entering "1/2" will give you "1/2". To -get "1/" you specify "\fraction1/2 ~". - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider my favorite breakfast recipe: - -\tabskip 3em plus 2em minus 2em -\halign{\lft{#}&\lft{#}\cr -\multispan2\ctr{\bd Muckles}\cr -3 eggs&beaten\cr -1 cp&cream\cr -1 cp&flour\cr - -\fraction1/4 t&baking powder\cr -1 T&sugar\cr -\multispan2\lft{pinch of salt}\cr -\multispan2\lft{bacon (optional)}\cr} -Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. -Pour all of -the batter into the pan. Cook @ approximately @ -10 minutes at 375@^\circ@. Cut into pieces -and serve hot with plenty of syrup. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Muckles | -| 3 eggs beaten | -| 1 cp cream | -| 1 cp flour | -| 14 t baking powder | -| 1 T sugar | -| pinch of salt | -| bacon (optional) | -| Heat butter or bacon in frying pan. Pour all of the batter into the | -| pan. Cook approximately 10 minutes at 375 degrees. Cut into pieces and | -| serve hot with plenty of syrup. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -There must be a space following the fraction as you enter it. In the above -example there had to be a space before the "t&baking powder\cr". diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fe55209b7e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/frenchsp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| frenchspacing | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 will double space after hard punctuation, unless the -letter prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all -interword spacing the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter -the \frenchspacing markup. This will turn off the extra spacing -following punctuation for the rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a -\nonfrenchspacing markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this bibliographic entry: - -\bibentry - -Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes -in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications, International. - -Without \frenchspacing it might print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | -| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -If you had specified \frenchspacing, - -\frenchspacing -\bibentry -Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes -in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications, International. - -it would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | -| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index d5c020dfa7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/goodbrea.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| goodbreak | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \goodbreak markup indicates a good place for page or line breaks. TEXT1 -will then break there only if necessary. This markup must be preceded by a -\par or vertical skip for a page break. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example will break the page before the last paragraph beginning "The -comparison may seem", if it comes close to the bottom of the page. - -\par -\nin{\bd Parallels.} -\par - -Consider for a moment rocks and deer. -Both form cooperative groups that furnish the -landscape . . . -The fruits of cooperation depend on conditions of -the environment. -\par -\goodbreak -The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate -oversimplification . . . - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index f3f45f42ea..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/halign.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,177 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| halign | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\halign{ preamble\cr - tabular text\cr} - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|preamble, tabular text, submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\lft, \ctr, \rt, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip, -\omit, \multispan, \phantom, && (column repeat)ã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \halign markup is a way of making tables without tabbing. A preamble, -or sample line, is included immediately after \halign to act as a template -for the text in each column. Each successive column in a row begins with an -ampersand (&). Column descriptions may contain horizontal spaces, indents, -quads, and horizontal fills. Each column description must have a pound - -sign (hash mark, #) which acts as a reference variable, so that text can be -substituted. - The halign is read in its entirety. Every column is treated as a box -whose width is equal to the largest entry. - Besides horizontal mode markup such as \indent, you can use the -following submarkup in the \halign. - -\lft in the preamble will left justify each entry in a column. - -\ctr in the preamble will center each entry in a column. - -\rt in the preamble will right justify each entry in a column. - -\cr marks the end of the preamble, and the end of each row. - -\noalign is used outside of the preamble. It allows you to enter vertical -mode text into a table. You must not end a \noalign with a \cr. For -example, if you wanted to skip a blank line between two row entries, you -would use \noalign{\vs{\bl}}: - - -1000&32\cr -\noalign{\vs{\bl}} -2000&43\cr - -\tabskip puts an equal amount of space (glue) between columns. A -specification of - -\tabskip 20pt plus 15pt minus 10pt - -indicates that the each column is set 20 points apart. If after the initial -try it is determined that the table is still narrower than the width of the -page, up to an additional 15 points of space is put between columns to try -and get the table to spread across the entire page. If after the initial -try of 20 points between each column it is determined that the table is -too wide to fit on the page, up to 10 points is subtracted from the space -between each column to try and get the table to fit on the page. - -\omit can be used to disable to preamble specification for that column -and row. \omit only works for one column of one row. For example, if a -preamble - -\halign{\lft{#}&\rt{#}\cr - -was specified, then to center a header over a column, you could enter - -\omit\ctr{Header 1}&\omit\ctr{Header 2}\cr -1000&2000\cr - -\multispan is used to permit spanning of several columns. For example, if -you had a preamble of - -\halign{\rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr - -and you wanted to center a title over the second and third columns, you -would enter: - -first column&\multispan2\ctr{Spanned title}\cr - -\phantom is used in decimal alignment. For example, - -00.1234&12.231\cr -72.8\phantom{000}&1.2\phantom{00}\cr - -would print the partial table: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 00.1234 12.231 | -| 72.8 1.2 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -&& is used to indicate that the following column preamble is to be repeated -for each of the remaining of columns. For example, if you wanted the first -column centered, the second column left justified, and the next five columns -right justified, you could enter - -\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}& - \rt{#}&\rt{#}&\rt{#}\cr - -Using the column repeat indicator (&&) you can simplify this to - -\halign{\ctr{#}&\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\cr - -This specification then says that columns 3, 4, etc. all use the same -preamble, "\rt{#}". - - ã|Example:ã% -This example illustrates \omit, \qquad and \tabskip. - -\tabskip .5in plus .4in minus .3in -\halign{\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr -\omit\ctr{Case}&\omit\qquad\ctr{Blast}\cr -\noalign{\vs{2pt}\hrule\vs{2pt}} -5000 MT&500\cr -10000 MT&845--1050\cr } - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| ..........5000.MT.......500............ | -| 10000 MT 845--1050 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% - -This example makes use of \multispan, \indent, -\horizontalspace, \noalign and column repeat (&&). - -\tabletitle{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr -Changes after Exchanges} -\vs{10pt} -\halign{\indent\lft{#}&\hs{2em}\rt{#} - &&\hs{1em}\rt{#}\cr -Case&\multispan4\ctr{Post Detonations (Days)}\cr -Megatonnage&20&100&200&300\cr -\noalign{\vs{10pt}} -1000&-22&8&7&13\cr -3000&9&6&8&10\cr -5000&-7&-26&-20&-11\cr -10000&-24&-45&-26&-9\cr} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | -| Changes after Exchanges | -| | -| | -| Case Post Detonations (Days) | -| Megatonnage 20 100 200 300 | -| | -| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | -| 3000 9 6 8 10 | -| 5000 -7 -26 -20 -11 | -| 10000 -24 -45 -26 -9 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\halign takes less computer time than \settabs because it is a basic -TEX command. The advantages to \halign over \settabs are: - - * maximum column widths are calculated automatically; you must measure - the longest entry with \settabs. - * templates are more versatile than \settabs; repeatable information can - be included in the preamble. - * greater flexibility. - Refer to The TEXbook for more about \halign, \cr, \noalign, \tabskip, -\phantom, \omit, \multispan, or && (column repeat). - You can use \autofootnote, \autoendnote, and \footnote inside of an -\halign, so long as they are not also inside an \hbox or \vbox. - Refer to the description of \leader for an example of using \halign with -dot leadering. - See \strut for row alignment. - Do not put a \cr on the same line as \noalign. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 552ad9c2b4..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hbox.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hbox | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|horizontal mode textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \hbox is a TEX markup which, among several uses, can be used to keep a -word together, preventing hyphenations. For example, - -\hbox{low-cut} - -would prohibit hyphenation of "low-cut". It can also be used in math mode -to switch to the roman font. For example, - -@x^{34}+\hbox{lower order terms}@ - -prints as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| x[34]+lower order terms | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You cannot use \autoendnote, \autofootnote, or \footnote within an \hbox. - You can also specify an \hbox to take up a certain size. For example, - -\hbox to 1in{} - -would create a box one inch wide. Refer to the discussion of \leader for -more on this option of \hbox. - For more on this markup refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 227b7b8040..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hangingindent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\hinã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \hangingindent markup sets the amount of space each line in a hanging -paragraph is indented after the first. The parameter must be a numerical -value with valid units of measure. - - ã|Example:ã% -The first and second hanging paragraph use a hanging indent of 18 points. -The third paragraph uses a hanging indent of 38 points. - -\psk{12pt} -\hangingindent{18pt} -\hangingparagraph - -BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; -or 'gross' as a description of human behavior. -\hangingparagraph -CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; -or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut -dress. -\hangingindent{38pt} -\hangingparagraph -DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; -or an informal epithet for hairless academics. -\par -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description | -| of human behavior. | -| | -| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position | -| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. | -| | -| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet | -| for hairless academics. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The hanging indent will remain in effect until changed with another -\hangingindent markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 54d1467d37..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hof.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hyphenoff | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\hofã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line -breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will -remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, hyphenation begins this example, - -Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long -term file and program storage devices. A more common -term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the -actual storage components look like platters or disks. - -\par -\hyphenoff -The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what -virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk -is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general, -users will have one 191 virtual disk. -\par -\hyphenon - -will print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Direct Access Storage De- | -| vice (DASD) is a term for long | -| term file and program storage | -| devices. A more common term | -| for the same thing is disk, | -| since the actual storage com- | -| ponents look like platters or | -| disks. | -| The CP Directory entry | -| for each user indicates what | -| virtual disks his machine will | -| include. Each disk is known | -| by its virtual address. In | -| general, users will have one | -| 191 virtual disk. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Compare this output to that of the \hyphenon markup on the next page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b2513733f8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hon.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,54 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hyphenon | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\honã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 will do hyphenation if necessary to achieve nice line -breaks. The \hyphenoff markup can be used to disable hyphenation. It will -remain this way until a \hyphenon is encountered. - - ã|Example:ã% -First print a paragraph without hyphenation and then turn hyphenation on. - -\hyphenoff -Direct Access Storage Device (DASD) is a term for long -term file and program storage devices. A more common -term for the same thing is {\it disk}, since the - -actual storage components look like platters or disks. -\par -\hyphenon -The CP Directory entry for each user indicates what -virtual disks his machine will include. Each disk -is known by its {\it virtual address}. In general, -users will have one 191 virtual disk. - -will print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Direct Access Storage | -| Device (DASD) is a term for | -| long term file and program | -| storage devices. A more | -| common term for the same thing | -| is disk, since the actual | -| storage components look like | -| platters or disks. | -| The CP Directory entry for | -| each user indicates what vir- | -| tual disks his machine will | -| include. Each disk is known | -| by its virtual address. In | -| general, users will have one | -| 191 virtual disk. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -Compare this output with the example for \hyphenoff on the previous page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b4137ea344..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hangingparagraph | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\hpã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \hangingparagraph markup creates hanging paragraphs, which are the -reverse of normal paragraphs. In a normal paragraph, the first line is -indented but following lines are full measure wide; in a hanging paragraph -the first line is a full measure and the runover lines are indented. -Hanging paragraphs are used for lists, glossaries, and bibliographies. The -\hangingparagraph markup is placed before each item in the text; a \par -finishes the series. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\psk{5pt} - -\hangingparagraph -BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; -or 'gross' as a description of human behavior. -\hangingparagraph -CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; -or to the position of the female bosom in a low-cut -dress. -\hangingparagraph -DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; -or an informal epithet for hairless academics. -\par - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| BASE. Can mean 'bedrock' in geological terms; or 'gross' as a description | -| of human behavior. | -| CLEAVAGE. Refers to the tendency to split along faults; or to the position | -| of the female bosom in a low-cut dress. | -| | -| DOMEHEAD. Is material pushing through a formation; or an informal epithet | -| for hairless academics. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The default indentation for \hangingparagraph is 24 points. Use the -\hangingindent markup to change this indentation. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3ba7e489ed..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hrule.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hrule | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|dimensionã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \hrule markup draws a horizontal rule across the width of the page. It -is a native TEX markup, and the usage is different in that the parameter is -not surrounded with curly braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1 -will print the rule across the entire width of the text. By default, the -rule drawn has a thickness (height) of .4pt. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted to draw a three inch rule across the page, followed later with -a rule across the entire width of the page and ending with a thicker rule -across the width of the page you could specify: - -\nin Basic Techniques - -\hrule width 3in -Editing a File -\hrule -The Column Pointer -\vs{2pt} -\hrule height 2pt - -You would get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| ........................................................................... | -| ........................................................................... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on \hrule and how to use the "depth" parameter -with the "height" and "width" parameters. - Use \rule instead of \hrule if you are using \monospace. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4e75ab6b32..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hs.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| horizontalspace | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\hsã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The amount of blank space in a line can be varied by the \horizontalspace -markup. This markup works only within the current line; no space will be -carried over if too little remains at the end of the line. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete: -\bqb\nin -\horizontalspace{84pt}pillow tectonics -\hs{48pt}during sleep -\hs{18pt}pillows come together - -\hs{24pt}and move apart -\hs{18pt}like continental plates -\hs{36pt}mountain ranges -\hs{18pt}rise and fall -\hs{24pt}oceans -\hs{18pt}rise and fall -\bqe -\nin Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology. -\par - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Our barbecues are brick. Our poetry is concrete: | -| | -| pillow tectonics during sleep pillows come | -| together and move apart like continental plates | -| mountain ranges rise and fall oceans rise and fall | -| | -| Like Gypsum Lee Ooze, art mimics geology. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\horizontalspace can be used in \settabs and \halign. - If you are using \monospace, then the units of measure should be -specified in tenths of an inch or in em's. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 9eaca127ef..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/hsize.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| hsize | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|dimensionã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \hsize markup is a native TEX markup that can be used to change the -width of the text on the printed page. This markup does not use delimeters. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you were entering text in a \vbox and you wanted it printed in a 3 inch -column instead of the default column width you could specify "\hsize=3in". -For example, - -Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back -of this publication. You can help us continue to improve -the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all -comments and suggestions. - -\vs{\bl} -\vbox{\hsize=3in -Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back -of this publication. You can help us continue to improve -the quality of our documentation, and we welcome all -comments and suggestions.} - -will print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Forms for reader's comments are provided at the back of this | -| publication. You can help us continue to improve the quality of | -| our documentation, and we welcome all comments and suggestions. | -| | -| Forms for reader's | -| comments are provided at the | -| back of this publication. | -| You can help us continue to | -| improve the quality of our | -| documentation, and we welcome | -| all comments and suggestions. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3b2f58acbf..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/incl.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| include | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\inclã% - -Parameters: ã|page segment nameã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \include markup will include external page segment files, into a TEXT1 -document. Page segments come from graphics generating programs such as -those produced by GDDM, SAS and MEGACALC. Refer to the GDDM Page Segment -Generation for the IBM 3820 User Note, U-419, for details on how to create a -page segment. - - The format for the \include markup is: - -\include{fn} - - Where fn is the filename of the file to be included into the text -document. It must have a filetype of "PSEG3820". You must leave space -after the page segment to prevent the image from overprinting the following -text of the document. - - ã|Example:ã% -A file called "GRAPH1 PSEG3820 A" contains a SAS/GRAPH image. It is 2 1 2 -inches high, so you would enter: - -. . . in the graph illustrated below: -\par -\include{graph1} -\vs{3.5in} -\noindent -Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . - -In the document you would get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| . . . in the graph illustrated below: | -| | -| | -| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU | -| | -| | -| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -Sometimes you may want to center the graph on the page. To do this you -would subtract the width of the graph from the galleywidth(1) and divide the -difference by 2; then you would do a horizontal skip of that amount (after -entering \null. For the above graph, the galleywidth is 25 picas, the width -of the "graph1" is 19 picas, so the indent is to be 3 picas ( 25pc-19pc -2=3pc ): - -| . . in the graph illustrated below: | -\par -\noindent\hs{3pc} -\include{graph1} -\vs{3.5in} -\noindent -Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - 1. galleywidth=page width - left margin - right margin - -In the document you would get the same graph as above, centered on the page. -Refer to the example below: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| . . . in the graph illustrated below: | -| | -| WWW W WWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWW WWW WWW SSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWWWWWW SSSSSS UUU UUU | -| WWWWW SSSSSSSS UUUUUUUUUU | -| | -| | -| Notice the values on the Y axis, they . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 42c0fbb071..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/indent.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| indent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \indent markup creates an empty box of horizontal space whose width is -the current value of \paragraphindent. This markup is useful in tabular -work. - - ã|Example:ã% -\tabletitle{Flea Deaths (in millions)} -\halign{\indent\rt{#}&\qquad\lft{#}\cr -Case&Blast\cr -5000 MT&500\cr -10000 MT&845--1050\cr } -\rule - -\vs{\bl} -These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note, -however, that inconsistencies occurred at . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Flea Deaths (in millions) | -| | -| Case Blast | -| 5000 MT 500 | -| 10000 MT 845--1050 | -| ........................................................................... | -| These statistics are fairly conclusive. Note, however, that | -| inconsistencies occurred at . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 6d262cedb2..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/index.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|INDEXã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\indexformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4ab3365aa4..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/input.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| input | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|filenameã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \input markup indicates a file to be included in the source. The -parameter, a CMS file name with a filetype of TEX, follows \input and a -separator space; no curly braces are used. - Usually the \input markup is used in a "driver" file, which calls parts, -chapters, etc. to create (or drive) the entire document, such as a thesis. -At the top of such a driver file is where you would put modifications to -default format blocks, additional font specifications, and your own markup -definitions. - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the file is to have a filename of "DRIVER". It calls all of -the various parts of a 2 chapter document. When formatting, specify DRIVER -as the filename. - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\newpage - \cl{\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl}} - \incontents{yes}} -\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} -\input preface -\input abstract -\input chapter1 -\input chapter2 -\input bibliog -\input append-a -\input append-b -\input index - - ã|Notes:ã% -If you want to input a file with a filetype other than TEX, you can do so by -adding the filetype after the filename and placing a period between the two. -For example, to input a filename of DATA and a filetype of LISTING, enter - -\input data.listing - - Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 56ed4190d9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/isk.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| interlineskip | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\iskã% - -Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The spacing between lines (from one baseline to the next, not "single" or -"double spacing") can be changed using the \interlineskip markup. TEXT1 -automatically sets an interline skip usually 2 points greater than the font -size when you use \selectfontset.(1) The default font size is 12 points and -the default interline skip is 14 points. This may be particularly helpful -when using some of the smaller fonts. In general, the shorter the line or -smaller the type, less interline skip is needed. - - ã|Example:ã% - 1. Extra space is referred to as leading, pronounced leding (from the -days when lead was used). - -\interlineskip{11pt} -The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the -geological basis of all social behavior. -It explains human behavior by empirical description -of the attributes of mineral composition. -\par -\interlineskip{13pt} -It is most successful when it provides detailed -description of particulate phenomena and first-order -correlations with features . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of | -| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description | -| of the attributes of mineral composition. | -| It is most successful when it provides detailed description of | -| particulate phenomena and first-order correlations with features . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\singlespace and \doublespace are dependent on the current setting of -\interlineskip. For example, the \doublespace leading when \interline- -skip{12pt} is 24pt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4055cb1bbc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/it.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| italic | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\itã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \italic markup sets an Italianate typeface, used for showing emphasis, -conveying a message, attracting attention, or even creating a mood. Italic -type is also good for contrast, and it is also hard to read over large -areas. For printers that do not have italics, underscoring will be used -instead. - - ã|Example:ã% -earlier; -\italic Japan \roman in Southeast Asia (previously in -China, now in the Philippines, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| earlier; Japan in Southeast Asia (previously in China, now in the | -| ----- | -| Philippines, | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -members communicate important things---{\it -hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual desire}---among -themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| members communicate important things---hunger, alarm, rank, and sexual | -| ------ ----- ---- --- ------ | -| desire---among themselves by means of nonsyntactical signals. | -| ------ | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4c0ecd3117..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/italicfa.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \italicface (\it) MARKUP | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \italicface (\it) markup will switch to the italic face text font and print -the text following the markup in italics. If the printer does not have an -italic font, a warning will issued and an underscore font will be substituted. - -The format for the \italicface markup is: - - \italicface ttttt - -Everything from the \italicface markup to the next font change will be printed -in italics. If only a word or two are to be printed in italics enclose the -italic face markup and the text that is to be printed in italics within a set -of braces. - - {\italicface ttttt} - -After printing the specified text in italics, TEXT1 will automatically switch -back to the standard face, or Roman font. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index abd96b000b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/item.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| item | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|identifierã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \item markup creates unique indented items. The parameters for this -markup is an identifier, such as an Arabic number or letter, supplied by -you. This offers more flexibility. - - ã|Example:ã% -militarily for thousands of years. -Reasons for this continued behavior include: -\item{*} the rapaciousness of society -(as shown by the accumulation of wealth and the -indifference to the poor and nonaggressive) -\item{**} the acceptance of war -\item{***} the economic advantages of large-scale -operations (as shown in industrial applications) -\par -\noindent -The cultures of industrial nations are based on -unethical . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| militarily for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior | -| include: | -| * the rapaciousness of society (as shown by the accumulation of wealth | -| and the indifference to the poor and nonaggressive) | -| ** the acceptance of war | -| *** the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in | -| industrial applications) | -| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The indentation for \item is determined by the current setting of paragraph -indent. Each \item forms a hanging paragraph after the identifier. There -is no extra space between items. - Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index cb92f5efea..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ix.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,311 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| index | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ixã% - -Parameters: ã|title textã% - -Submarkup: ã|\subentry, \blindentry, \uspn, \bdpn, \itpnã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \index markup builds index entries which can be sorted and printed at -the end of a document. The \index markup has the format - -\indexn{entry} - -where "n" is the index number (1, 2, or 3), and "entry" is the index -entry. The page number you are on when the \index markup is inserted will -be printed with the "entry". You must use the \printindex markup to sort -and print the index. It comes at the end of the document. Refer to the -documentation of \printindex for details on this markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this index example: - -The files you create and change have a filemode of A. -This means that they are all kept in a collection of -files called your A-disk. The FILELIST command -displays a list of all -\index1{A-disk} -the files on your A-disk. - -In the document, the following would print where the index markup occurred, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The files you create and change have a filemode of A. This means | -| that they are all kept in a collection of files called your A-disk. The | -| FILELIST command displays a list of all the files on your A-disk. | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -If this occurred on page 32, the entry in the index printed with -\printindex1 would print as illustrated on the next page. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| A-disk, 32 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You cannot use \index within a \settabs or \halign. - -ã|Lower Level or Sub entriesã% - - If you want to record a subentry to a main index entry you use the -\subentry markup within the \index markup. - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \subentry markup is only valid when used within \index. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you had a main entry called "reader list" and you wanted sub entries for -"receiving a file" and "replacing a file" you could enter the \index markup -as illustrated here: - -\sha{Receiving a File} -To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that -describes the file you want to receive. -\index1{reader list \subentry1{receiving a file}} -Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line -telling you that the file has been received, . . . -\sha{Replacing or Renaming a File} -What happens if the file in your reader has the same file -label as one you already have on your disk? -There are two ways to handle this. -\lib\lil1 -If you want the file in your reader to replace the file -\index1{reader list \subentry1{replacing a file}} -on your disk, type the command "receive / (replace". -\lil1 - -If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename -the file in your reader with the command "receive / newname -\index1{reader list\subentry1{renaming a file}} -newtype" where "newname" is the new file name and -"newtype" is the new filetype. -\lie - -This would produce the following paragraph in a document: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Receiving a File | -| To receive a file, move the cursor to the line that describes the file | -| you want to receive. Then press PF9. A notice will appear on that line | -| telling you that the file has been received, ... | -| | -| Replacing or Renaming a File | -| What happens if the file in your reader has the same file label as one | -| you already have on your disk? There are two ways to handle this. | -| 1. If you want the file in your reader to replace the file on your disk, | -| type the command "receive / (replace". | -| 2. If you want to keep the file on your disk, then rename the file | -| in your reader with the command "receive / newname newtype" where | -| "newname" is the new file name and "newtype" is the new filetype. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -If list level #2 printed at the top of page 33, the index entries would look -like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| reader list | -| receiving a file, 32 | -| renaming a file, 33 | -| replacing a file, 32 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|Excluding Text from the Sortã% - There are occasions when you will want text to print in an indexed item, -but you do not want that text to be a part of the sorting process. For -example, you may want to index the title "Consumer Guides" including the -quotes, but you want it sorted with the C's and not sorted with the double -quote marks. Also, you probably would want to sort \par with the p's, and -not with the backslashes. Both can be accomplished using the \sortasmarkup -which can only be used within the \index markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -Using the input, - -Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guides" and -\index1{"Consumer Guides"\sortas{Consumer Guides}} -refer to the illustration on page 5. -\par -Be sure to index the paragraph command "\\par" -\index1{\\par\sortas{par}} -somewhere in the document. - -you would get the following two paragraphs in your document. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Please get a copy of the article "Consumer Guide References" and refer | -| to the illustration on page 5. | -| | -| Be sure to index the paragraph command "\par" somewhere in the | -| document. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The index entries would print like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| "Consumer Guides", 45 | -| contour Maps, 23 | -| | -| \par, 45 | -| Paragraphs, long, 16 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -Prepositions in a subentry may not be part of the sort, but are to be -printed in the index. For example, to get the index to look like, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| vacations | -| on boats, 32 | -| at the Olympian, 21 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -you would use the \index, \subentry, and \sortas commands illustrated on the -next page. - -Some people spend their vacations at older -hotels like the Olympian. -\index1{vacations \subentry1{at the -Olympian\sortas{Olympian}}} - -Another popular vacation is travelling the -Pacific in a boat. -\ix1{vacations\subentry1{on - boats\sortas{boats}}} - - ã|Example:ã% -As another example, "10 Downing Street" is typically sorted with the T's -and not prior to the 2's. This can also be accomplished using the \sortas -markup. For example, the Prime Minister's address mentioned earlier would -be entered as: - -Taxi, please take me to 10 Downing Street. - -\index1{10 Downing Street\sortas{ten Downing Street}} - -ã|Highlighted Page Numbersã% - For those applications which require some of the page numbers to be -printed in bold, some in italics, and others underscored, there are three -markup available to do this. They are \boldpagenumber, \italicpagenumber, -and \underscorepagenumber. They are all used within the \index markup, and -indicate to TEXT1 that a page number other than the standard page number is -to be used. - We recommend that important references be noted in bold (\boldpage- -number). Fleeting references be printed with italics (\italicpagenumber). -And primary references be indicated by being underscored (\underscorepage- -number). Of course, you are free to use these three markup as you see -fit. - The bold page number will always come prior to a standard face reference -to the same page. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you had an \boldpagenumber on page 43 and \index's on pages 42--44 for -"peace." - -\index1{peace} % Located on page 42 - -\index1{peace} % Located on page 43 -\index1{peace\bdpn} % Located on page 43 - -\index1{peace} % Located on page 44 - -the index printed with \printindex would look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| peace 43, 42--44 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you have an underscored page number and it falls in the same range as a -standard face entry, the underscored entry would follow the standard face -entry. For example, if you had a \underscorepagenumber on page 66 and -\index's on pages 66--72 for "nationalism", - -\index1{nationalism\uspn} % On page 66 -\index1{nationalism} % On page 66 -\index1{nationalism} % On page 67 -\index1{nationalism} % On page 72 - -the index sequence would print like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| Quick Programming Language 66--72, 66 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you have an index reference in italics and it falls in the same range as -a standard face entry, the italics entry will not be printed. For example, -if you had an italics entry using \italicpagenumber on pages 45 and 56, and -you had standard face entries on pages 54--60 for "In Search of Excellence", -the printed index would look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| In Search of Excellence 45, 54--60 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|Cross Referencesã% - Often it is desirable to have a cross reference to another index entry. -You can do this using the \blindentry markup within the \index markup. You -cannot use both \blindentry and \subentry within the same \index markup. -The \blindentry markup has the format, - -\blindentry{blind entry} - -where "blind entry" is the text you want associated with that index entry. - - ã|Example:ã% -For example, to get an index entry to print like - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| Flow of control, see Control Structures | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -you would enter - -\index1{Flow of control\blindentry{see Control -Structures}} - - ã|Example:ã% -It is also possible to have a blind entry printed with an index entry, and -still have it indexed with page numbers. For example, if you were to enter - -\index1{Label\uspn} -\index1{Label\blindentry{({\it see also} Case Label)}} - -on page 78 you would get an index entry printed as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| Label, 78, (see also Case Label) | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -If you have page numbers and a blind entry, then the blind entry will follow -the last page number as illustrated here. - -ã|Multiple Indexesã% - You can have multiple indexes by changing the "1" in \index1 to "2" or -"3". For example, - -\index1{entry in first index} -\index2{entry in second index} -\index3{entry in third index} - -will generate one entry in each of three indexes. See \printindex for -instructions on how to print out each of the three indexes. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a57b8f352b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ixf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| indexformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ixfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\respectcase, \style, \leadering, \everyhang, -\everyletterbreak, \indentsubentry, \everyindexã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The defaults listed above for each markup applies initially to each of -the three indexes. One or more indexes' defaults can all be changed -by modifying the \indexformat markup. The complete description of the -\indexformat markup and its related submarkup is: - -\indexformatn{format} - -where n is the index (1, 2, or 3) and format is the submarkup. - -ã|respectcaseã% ignores the case of an index entry. This markup can only be -used within the \indexformat markup. If you wanted case respected and have -the lower case letters sorted before the upper case entries (i.e., "boat" -sorted before "Bed") then enter - -\respectcase{yes} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Respecting case applies to all letters. If \respectcase{yes} has been -specified, then "boat" and "cat" will both be sorted before "Bed". The -default value is \respectcase{no} for each of the 3 indexes. - -ã|styleã% regulates the general index format. \style{indent}, the default, -indents each index entry. This style looks like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | -| alien rule of, 20 | -| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | -| Crusades and, 22, 57 | -| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - There are two other styles to choose from: "paragraph" and "dash". The -style "paragraph" is a run-on hanging paragraph. You get it by specifying: - -\indexformat1{\style{paragraph}} - -With this style, the above index would look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Constantinople, 12, alien rule | -| of, 20, Arab invasion of, 19, | -| 31, Crusades and, 22, 57, | -| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31, See | -| also Istanbul | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Note that with this style, the blind entry from the \blindentry submarkup -comes after the subentry, instead of after the main entry as was done for -the "indent" style. - The third style is "dash", an em-dash style. You get it by specifying - -\indexformat1{\style{dash}} - -It is very similar to the default "indent" style, except subentries are -prefaced with an em dash following the initial indent of space. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | -| ---alien rule of, 20 | -| ---Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | -| ---Crusades and, 22, 57 | -| ---Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|leaderingã% turns on/off dot leadering. The default is "off". You -can change this default only within the \indexformat markup. To have dot -leadering, enter: - -\ixf1{\leadering{yes}} - -If you are using \style{indent} and \leadering{yes} you get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Constantinople, See also | -| Istanbul ... . ... ... . ....12 | -| alien rule of ... . ... 20 | -| Arab invasion of . . .19, 31 | -| Crusades and .... . .22, 57 | -| Ottoman conquest of .29--31 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Do not use dot leadering with \style{paragraph}. - -ã|everyletterbreakã% is what will be printed between each letter break, -(i.e. between "A" and "B"). By default, one blank line is skipped when -starting a new letter (at each letter break). The \everyletterbreak markup -can only appear within the \indexformat markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -You could modify the default to place a rule and skip between breaks: - -\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} - \hrule width 2in - \vs{\bl}}} - - This would look something like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ..................... | -| alpha, 62 | -| America, 38 | -| Austria, 55 | -| ..................... | -| | -| Bach, 98 | -| Bethlehem, 87 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -Something else you can do with indexes is to make use of the "\nextletter" -submarkup, which gives you the next uppercase character about to be listed -in the sorted index list. For example, between "apple" and "boat" the -value of "\nextletter" would be "B". One application would be to print the -"\nextletter" in a large type. This could be accomplished by changing the -default for "\everyletterbreak" to: - -\indexformat{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} - \noindent{\twelvepoint\bd\nextletter}\par}} - -The resulting index would look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| A | -| alpha, 62 | -| America, 38 | -| Austria, 55 | -| | -| B | -| Bach, 98 | -| Bethlehem, 87 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -Another variation of the above would be to draw a box around the next -letter. You could do this by adding \drawbox to \everyletterbreak: - -\ixf1{\everyletterbreak{\vs{\bl} - \drawbox{\bd\nextletter}\par}} - -and you will get an index that prints as illustrated on the next page. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ..... | -| ..... | -| alpha, 62 | -| America, 38 | -| Austria, 55 | -| | -| ..... | -| ..... | -| Bach, 98 | -| Bethlehem, 87 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The "\nextletter" is always an uppercase letter. - Only letters, not numbers or special characters such as the backslash -(\) are used as \nextletter. - -ã|indentsubentryã% There are two levels of subentries available. The amount -of distance they are indented when you are using the "indent" or "dash" -styles is controlled by the \indentsubentry submarkup. If you are using -the "paragraph" style for the index, the \indentsubentry is ignored. The -definition of this markup is, - -\ixf1{\indentsubentryn{amt}} - -where n is the subentry level, 1 or 2, and amt is the amount to be indented. -The default indent for these two subentry levels is: - -\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{1em} - \indentsubentry2{2em}} - - If, for example, you were using the "indented" style and wanted each -subentry level indented two em's from the previous level, you would enter, - -\ixf1{\indentsubentry1{2em} - \indentsubentry2{4em}} - -which would print the index illustrated earlier as: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Constantinople, 12, See also Istanbul | -| alien rule of, 20 | -| Arab invasion of, 19, 31 | -| Crusades and, 22, 57 | -| Ottoman conquest of, 29--31 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|everyhangã% controls the hanging indent for the primary index level and -each of the two subentry levels. If you had an index entry with many page -numbers, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Write state- | -| ment, 26, | -| 34--38, 70, | -| 86, | -| 103, 191, | -| 202, 203-- | -| 204, 281 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The hangingindent would be 1.5em by default. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted to increase that value to 3em, you would enter, - -\ixf1{\everyhang{3em}} - -and you would get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Write state- | -| ment, 26, | -| 34--38, | -| 70, 86, | -| 103, 191, | -| 202, 203-- | -| 204, 281 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|everyindexã% is a list of one or more commands to be executed before -printing the sorted index. By default, \tenpt is the value of \everyindex. - - ã|Notes:ã% -The default type style used with \monospace is \roman instead of \tenpt. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 48b4541b3d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ju.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| justify | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\juã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \justify markup makes each line exactly the same length and aligns -both left and right margins vertically. TEXT1 automatically sets pages -with full justification by default. The \justify markup is used to reset -justification after using \rightragged or \leftragged. - - ã|Example:ã% -\rightragged -Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah -(c. 420 {\caps b.c.}). -Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient - -Jewish history---the return to Judea after seventy -years of captivity in Babylon. -\justify -Consists of two parts separated by several years: -Chapters 1 to 6, the return of the first caravan under -leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 to 10, an -expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Setting: Continuation of the narrative of Nehemiah (c. 420 b.c.). | -| Supplies information on an important epoch in ancient Jewish history---the | -| return to Judea after seventy years of captivity in Babylon. | -| Consists of two parts separated by several years: Chapters 1 to 6, | -| the return of the first caravan under leadership of Zerubbabel; chapters 7 | -| to 10, an expedition, sixty years later, conducted by Ezra. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -When you specify \justify, text will be justified until TEXT1 sees a -\rightragged or \leftragged. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fce94d1349..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/la.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| label | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\laã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \label markup creates labelled paragraphs. Labels will appear to the -left of the paragraph described, in a 72 point (one inch) zone. A label is -similar to a hanging paragraph, except that the first line is aligned with -the indented portion and the label is separated by a gutter of 1 em space. -The skip between labels is one blank line. To begin a new paragraph at the -same indentation as the previous label, enter "\label{}" with no entry in -the parameter field of the \label. - - ã|Example:ã% -origin of rock provides clues. -\label{Sedimentary} rock is recemented from - -particles of older rock that has been broken down -by physical and chemical weathering. -\label{Metamorphic} -rock is igneous or sedimentary that has been -altered by temperature and pressure. -\la{} -Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| origin of rock provides clues. | -| Sedimentaryrock is recemented from particles of older rock that has been | -| broken down by physical and chemical weathering. | -| | -| Metamorphicrock is igneous or sedimentary that has been altered by | -| temperature and pressure. | -| Human cells act in a manner like sedimentary rock. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The label indent and the gutter width can be modified with the \labelformat -markup diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 362b463298..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/label.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|LABELã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\labelformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 748b10c7c7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/laf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,120 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| labelformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\labelformat{\skipbefore{1\bl} - \labelwidth{72pt} - \gutter{1em} - \everylabel{\rm} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\lafã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \labelwidth, \gutter, -\everylabelã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \labelformat markup controls the appearance of labelled paragraphs. - -\skipbefore indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -block. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -\labelwidth sets the amount of space to contain the label to the left of -the paragraph. The shaded portion illustrated here is the "label width" -area: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| SCALE, | -| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween | -| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The default label width is 72 points (one inch). To change to a label width -of 1 2 inch you would enter, - -\labelformat{\labelwidth{.5in}} - -\gutter keeps a small amount of space between the label and the paragraph. -The shaded portion illustrated on the next page is the "label gutter" area. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| SCALE, | -| nmin, nmax fornhalfwordxdata.)nteSince pixeledifferences5can(rangeabetween | -| -255 and +255 (-511 and . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The default amount is 1 em space. To change to a label gutter of 5 points -you would enter, - -\labelformat{\gutter{5pt}} - -\everylabel determines the type face and size of the label itself. The -default is roman face and right ragged. - - ã|Example:ã% -The sample markup reduces the skipbefore amount, increases the labelwidth -(to suit a larger format), and changes the font for labels to 9 point bold. -Note the use of displayed math mode. - -\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} -\labelformat{\skipbefore{6pt} - \labelwidth{108pt} - \gutter{1em} - \everylabel{\ninepoint\bd}} -\label{HALF} -specifies that both input datasets are halfword -(maximum 511 DN) (default is byte data). -\la{ADD} specifies that the sum of the two input -datasets is to be computed (default is the -computation of the difference image). - -\la{SCALE, nmin, nmax} -nmin and nmax are integers between -255 and 510 -(-511 and 1022 for halfword data.) Since . . . -\la{} -If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0.\lbr -If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K.\lbr -If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then -@@OUTPUT = K*{N(I,J)-nmin\over nmax-nmin}@@ -where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has -been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) + IN2(I,J) -and K = 255 (511 for halfword data). -\la{TRANS\lbr sl1, ss1, sl2, ss2}sl1 and ss1 are -line and sample -coordinates for a point in IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the -corresponding coordinates for the point in IN2. If HALF -has been specified, ss1 and ss2 refer to {\it bytes} -(not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| HALF specifies that both input datasets are halfword (maximum | -| 511 DN) (default is byte data). | -| ADD specifies that the sum of the two input datasets is to | -| be computed (default is the computation of the difference | -| image). | -| | -| SCALE, nmin, | -| nmax 1022 for halfword data.)rsSincewe.n.-.55 and 510 (-511 and | -| If N(I,J) is less than nmin, the OUTPUT=0. | -| If N(I,J) is greater than nmax, the OUTPUT=K. | -| If N(I,J) is between or equal to nmin and nmax then | -| OUTPUT = K*N(I,J)-nmin nmax-nmin where N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) - | -| IN2(I,J) or if "ADD" has been specified, N(I,J) = IN1(I,J) | -| + IN2(I,J) and K = 255 (511 for halfword data). | -| | -| TRANS | -| sl1, ss1, sl2,IN1, and sl2 and ss2 are the corresponding coordinates for | -| ss2 the pointsinaIN2.inIfaHALFahasebeenrspecified,rss1pandtss2 | -| refer to bytes (not sample) in IN1 and In2, respectively. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4982e67f9c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lbr.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| linebreak | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lbrã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \linebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a -paragraph. Occasionally it is necessary to break a line in a precise place -within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1 decide where to break the -line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it simply starts the following -text of the paragraph on a new line instead of concatenating it to the end -of the previous line. - - ã|Example:ã% -This article is an outline of the codification of -Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology. -The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient - -concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology -and astrology. Figure 1 shows a -schema borrowed from my previous book,\linebreak -{\it The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes},\lbr -which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved. -Geologists have always been intrigued by comparisons -between societies of rocks and those of vertebrates, -between two kingdoms. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into | -| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of | -| self-sufficient concepts that with such disciplines as cosmetology and | -| astrology. Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, | -| The Intact Societies: Vestals and Volcanoes, | -| which suggests how the amalgam can be achieved. Geologists have always | -| been intrigued by comparisons between societies of rocks and those of | -| vertebrates, between two kingdoms. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -See \break for the difference between these two markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index e34179520b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/leader.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| leader | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \leader markup is most often used in the \tableofcontentsformat in -conjunction with a page number. It produces dot leadering. You can also -use \leader in an \halign. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example using leaders also illustrates the use of \indent in \halign. - -The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of -{\it taxes, insurance, maintenance,} and -{\it depreciation} are: -\halign{\indent\indent\hbox to 13pc {#\leader}& - \rt{#}\ \%\cr - -Taxes&1.00\cr -Insurance&.75\cr -Maintenance repairs&2.00\cr -Depreciation&4.00\cr -Miscellaneous&.25\cr -\indent\bd Total&8.00\cr} - -Will print: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The average annual costs of owning buildings in terms of taxes, | -| insurance, maintenance, and depreciation are: | -| Taxes . .... .. .....1.00 % | -| Insurance ... . ... ..75 % | -| Maintenance repairs . 2.00 % | -| Depreciation. . . ... 4.00 % | -| Miscellaneous. . .... .25 % | -| Total ... . ... 8.00 % | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Notice in the last line the the ampersand (&) acted as a font delimiter for -the \bd which printed "Total". diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode deleted file mode 100644 index 754e174b0c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/letter.helpmode +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|LETTERã%model is a general letter model. It is a template. You may modify -it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 251f2203c3..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lib.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| listbegin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\libã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \listbegin markup starts a series of items set off with numbers, -letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listbegin markup ends the previous -paragraph. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Some nations have historically dominated others. -\par -\listbegin -\bul United States in Latin America (and the Pacific) -\bul Europe in Africa (especially England, France, - -Germany, the Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain) -\bul Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now -in the Philippines, Borneo, and others) -\bul Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South -America and the Caribbean) -\bul China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast -Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam) -\listend -\noindent -Countries have tried to dominate each other . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Some nations have historically dominated others. | -| * United States in Latin America (and the Pacific) | -| * Europe in Africa (especially England, France, Germany, the | -| Netherlands---perhaps Portugal and Spain) | -| * Japan in Southeast Asia (earlier in China, now in the Philippines, | -| Borneo, and others) | -| * Russia in Eastern Europe (and attempts in South America and the | -| Caribbean) | -| * China in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast Asia---Campuchea, and | -| Vietnam) | -| Countries have tried to dominate each other . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3bc295573f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lie.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| listend | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lieã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \listend markup finishes a series of items set off with numbers, -letters, or bullets (raised dots). The \listend returns text to paragraph -mode. - - ã|Example:ã% -Reasons for this continued behavior include: -\par -\listbegin -\lil1 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons -and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles) -\lil1 military forces (the troops and support personnel - -necessary to impose policy by force) -\listend -\noindent -The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Reasons for this continued behavior include: | -| 1. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop carriers, | -| and personnel vehicles) | -| 2. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to impose | -| policy by force) | -| The cultures of industrial nations are based on . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index ed5b99e21a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lif.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,128 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| listformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\listformat{\skipbefore{0\bl} - \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)} - \everylistlevel1{\rm\lin{36pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel2{\rm\lin{58pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel3{\rm\lin{79pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel4{\rm\lin{101pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel5{\rm\lin{122pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel6{\rm\lin{144pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everylistlevel7{\rm\lin{166pt}\gutter{1em}} - \everybullet{\rm\lin{+36pt}\gutter{1em}} - \skipafter{0\bl}} - -Abbreviation: ã|\lifã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\skipbefore, \everylistleveln, \everybullet, -\skipafter, \liststyleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \listformat markup permits changes to the TEXT1 ordered list style, list -indentation, or other formatting of an outline list. - -ã|\skipbeforeã% indicates how much space is to be skipped before printing a -list. This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - -ã|\liststyleã% sets the order of identifiers for the seven levels of a list. -Up to seven list styles may be entered in the \liststyle markup, each -separated by commas. The complete collection of possible list level styles -is: - - "1.", "a.", "A.", "i.", "I.", "1)", "a)", "A)", "i)", "I)", - "(1)", "(a)", "(A)", "(i)", "(I)", "1]", "a]", "A]", "i]", "I]", - "[1]", "[a]", "[A]", "[i]", "[I]" - - ã|Example:ã% -Note that every listlevel does not have to be changed or entered. - -\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} - \liststyle{1.,a),(1)}} - -If your terminal does not have square brackets, you can use the \leftsquare- -bracket and \rightsquarebracket markup within the \liststyle markup. For -example: - - \liststyle{\lsb1.\rsb, a.} - -ã|\everylistleveln{Nested Markup}ã% The "n" indicates the list level number, -from 1 to 7. Each of the seven list levels has its own \everylistlevel -markup. The default indentation increases for each level down. You may use -Nested Markup such as font changes, \leftindent, \rightindent, and \gutter. - - * \leftindent is the distance from the left margin to the start of the -text of the item. The left indent is the shaded portion illustrated below: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation | -| to the office place. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - * \gutter is the distance between the list level indicator and the text of -the item. The gutter is the shaded portion illustrated below: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| a. The "computer on a chip" has made it possible to extend automation | -| to the office place. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|\everybullet{Nested Markup}ã% Bullets can be used by themselves in a list -or after any level. If you wanted to change this default to have a right -ragged bullet with 36-point left and right indents, you would specify: - -\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} - \everybullet{\rightragged\lin{36pt}\rin{36pt}} - \skipafter{0pt}} - -ã|\skipafterã% indicates how much space is to be skipped after printing a list. -This amount is in addition to any paragraph skips. - - ã|Example:ã% -Assuming you wanted the text to be right justified and double spaced in a 10 -point Computer Modern font and the list levels to be right ragged and single -spaced in a 9 point Computer Modern font, the \listformat could be entered -as illustrated on the next page. - -\sfs{cm9}{ninept}{default} - -\listformat{\skipbefore{0pt} - \liststyle{1.,a.,i.,1),a),i),(1)} - \everylistlevel1{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{24pt}} - \everylistlevel2{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{.8in}} - \everylistlevel3{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.1in}} - \everylistlevel4{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.4in}} - \everylistlevel5{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{1.7in}} - \everylistlevel6{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.0in}} - \everylistlevel7{\rr\ninept\pin{.5in}\lin{2.3in}} - \skipafter{0pt}} - -. . . bridge specifications: | -\lib\lil1 Falsework under all spans shall be completely -released before forms are constructed and concrete is -placed in rail bases and traffic and pedestrian barriers. -\lil1 In order to determine the condition of column concrete, -forms shall always be removed from columns before releasing -supports from beneath beams and girders. -\lie - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| . . . bridge specifications: | -| 1. Falsework under all spans shall be completely released before forms | -| are constructed and concrete is placed in rail bases and traffic and | -| pedestrian barriers. | -| 2. In order to determine the condition of column concrete, forms shall | -| always be removed from columns before releasing supports from beneath | -| beams and girders. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 101297f484..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lil.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| listlevel | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lilnã% - -Parameters: ã|n, 1 to 7ã% - - ã|Description:ã% -TEXT1 provides seven levels of list enumeration. The levels in a list are -each designated with a \listlevel markup; each level is differentiated with -a list level number n, 1 to 7. To specify an outline list, start with the -\listbegin markup followed by \listlevel, and ending with a \listend. Each -\listlevel will indent an absolute amount from the left margin. The default -indentation for level 1 is 36 points ( 1/2 inch); level 2 is 58 points; and -each level increases. - - ã|Example:ã% -\lib -\lil1 Humans vs. rocks. - -\lil2 Rocks are food source for humans. -\lil3 Igneous -\lil3 Metamorphic -\lil2 Humans are food source for rocks. -\lil1 Rocks vs. humans. -\lie -\nin Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. Humans vs. rocks. | -| a. Rocks are food source for humans. | -| i. Igneous | -| ii. Metamorphic | -| b. Humans are food source for rocks. | -| 2. Rocks vs. humans. | -| Only more research can dig up facts for solving . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each \listlevel must have a beginning \listbegin and an ending \listend. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index df27e80960..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| leftindent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\linã% - -Parameters: ã|unit of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \lin markup indents text from the left margin. The value may be -relative, e.g., {+.5in}, which adds (or subtracts) the amount from the -current left margin or current indent (if one is in effect). The default -for left indent is zero. The indentation remains until another \leftindent -overrides it. This markup causes a break in text. - - ã|Example:ã% -from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, -because of the inevitability of entropic direction. -\vs{9pt} -\leftindent{+1in} - -What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can -minerals influence human social behavior, any more -than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.' -\par -\leftindent{-1in} -\rightline{Clay Gneiss} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the | -| inevitability of entropic direction. | -| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals | -| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This | -| theory is 'on the rocks.' | -| Clay Gneiss | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -You can also use grouping to limit the effects of the \leftindent. If you -do, be sure that the last paragraph to be indented is followed by a \par. -The above illustration could also have been accomplished with grouping as -illustrated on the next page. - -from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, -because of the inevitability of entropic direction. -\vs{9pt} -{\leftindent{+1in} -What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can -minerals influence human social behavior, any more -than gravity? This theory is 'on the rocks.' -\par -} -\rightline{Clay Gneiss} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| from Camus: The rock should be left at the bottom, because of the | -| inevitability of entropic direction. | -| | -| What I have read doesn't make any sense. How can minerals | -| influence human social behavior, any more than gravity? This | -| theory is 'on the rocks.' | -| Clay Gneiss | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index e10d568d60..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/line.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| line | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \line markup is used most often in the \runningheadformat and \running- -footformat running title markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted to left justify "Chapter 1" and right justify "page 2" (where -"2" is actually the page number, \pagenumber), enter: - -\rhf{\bothpages{ - \line{\lft{Chapter 1}\rt{page \pagenumber}}}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter 1 page 1 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -A construct such as, - -\rhf{\bothpages{ - \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} - -will not print the date centered on the page: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 2 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with -\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the -date: - -\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} - \vs{-\bl} - \line{\ctr{\today}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 3 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 1394439251..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lint.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| lineinterval | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lintã% - -Parameters: ã|intervalã% - - ã|Description:ã% -When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified, -this markup is used to specify when a line number is to be printed for line -numbering in the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at -the top of a document. The default is every fifth line counted will be -numbered. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted every tenth line counted to be numbered, you would specify: - -\lineinterval{10} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. - You may specify an interval from 0-255. Practically speaking, you -should specify an interval from 1-150. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a872714bb7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lir.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| listresume | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lirã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -\listresume is used to end a lower listlevel and return to the next higher -listlevel without starting a new point. - - ã|Example:ã% -\lib -\lil1 All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with -indicating switches and wiring to provide local control -of the following functions: -\lil2 Transfer from automatic to manual operation, -\lil2 Transfer from normal operation to flashing, -\listresume - -Combined master and intersection controllers shall have -indicating switches for functions (b) and (c), above, -for interconnected system. -\par -Combined master and intersection controllers shall also -have provisions for time switch control. -\lil1 All fixed-time controllers shall be . . . -\listend - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. All fixed time controllers shall be equipped with indicating switches | -| and wiring to provide local control of the following functions: | -| a. Transfer from automatic to manual operation, | -| b. Transfer from normal operation to flashing, | -| Combined master and intersection controllers shall have indicating | -| switches for functions (b) and (c), above, for interconnected system. | -| Combined master and intersection controllers shall also have | -| provisions for time switch control. | -| 2. All fixed-time controllers shall be . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 9c6016c1d8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lists.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|LISTSã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\listformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 26007a09dd..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lnf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| linenumberfont | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lnfã% - -Parameters: ã|fontã% - - ã|Description:ã% -When \printingnumbers{yes} and \countinglines{yes} have both been specified, -this markup is used to specify what font the line number is to be printed in -the margin of a document. It need only be specified once at the top of a -document. The default is font "etsc 8", which is English Times Small Caps -at 8 point. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted to use Plantin Roman, you would specify: - -\linenumberfont{plr 10} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. - See the Font Catalog to determine what fonts to use. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index bab03a2243..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/lr.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| leftragged | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\lrã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \leftragged markup leaves the left margin uneven after formatting. This -markup is used only with unusual text, for instance, introductory quotes for -chapters. - - ã|Example:ã% -\leftragged -The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate -oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and general -theoretification. -Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as the - -general theory of Sociogeology predicts the features of -social organization from knowledge of population -parameters and behavioral constraints imposed by -the mineral constitution of the species. -\par -Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high -temperatures, fever, for instance. -Metamorphic crystallization involves low temperatures; -\justify - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Thecomparison mayseemfacile, butfrom deliberateoversimplificationcomes | -| complex obfuscationandgeneral theoretification.Behavioral researchwilllead | -| inthis direction,asthe generaltheoryof Sociogeologypredicts thefeaturesof | -| social organizationfromknowledge ofpopulation parametersandbehavioral | -| constraints imposedbythe mineralconstitution ofthespecies. | -| Humansexhibit metamorphicbehaviorover timeor athightemperatures, | -| fever,forinstance. Metamorphiccrystallization involveslowtemperatures; | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use \justify to turn the justification back on again. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu deleted file mode 100644 index 29c37a2849..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/markup.helpmenu +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| Summary of TEXT1 Markup | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - Help may be selected for the following markup by placing the cursor -under any of the first eight characters of the desired markup abbreviation -followed bypressing the PF1 key. - -Abbreviation Markup Name Function - -app \appendix{} designate appendix -apf \appendixformat{} modify appendix style -aib \asisbegin start 'as is' text -aie \asisend end 'as is' text -aif \asisformat{} modify 'as is' style -aen \autoendnote{} save endnote -afn \autofootnote{} add footnote -bie \bibentry start entry -bib \bibliography{} designate bibliography -bif \bibliographyformat{} modify bibliography style -bqb \blockquotebegin start block quote -bqe \blockquoteend end block quote -bqf \blockquoteformat{} modify block quote style -bd \bold call bold font -bi \bolditalic call bolditalic font -break \break force line and page breaks -bul \bullet start bullet -cc \caps call caps/small caps font -cl \centerline{} center one line -clb \centerlinesbegin begin centering, 'as is' -cle \centerlinesend end centering -cents \cents cent sign -chap \chapter{} designate chapter -chf \chapterformat{} modify chapter style -coul \countinglines{} start counting lines -dsp \doublespace start alternate blank lines -db \drawbox{} draw a box around text -dbrs \drawboxrulesize{} thickness of a box's rule -dbm \drawboxmat{} white space around a box -die \dumpinsertseject dump and print inserts -el \ellipsis{} 3 or 4 dot ellipsis -ep \emptypage print an empty page -enf \endnoteformat{} modify endnote style -epm \evenpagemargin used in line numbering -ex \extension call the extension font -fig \figure{}{} create a figure -fif \figureformat{} modify figures -fixf \fixedformat multiple column format style -font \font font definition -footnote \footnote{}{} add footnote -fnf \footnoteformat{} modify footnote style -frac \fraction print a fraction -frenchspacing \frenchspacing spacing for bibliographies -goodbreak \goodbreak indicate likely page break -halign \halign table building -hin \hangingindent set hanging paragraph indent -hp \hangingparagraph start hanging paragraph -hbox \hbox TEX horizontal box -hs \horizontalspace{} add horizontal space -hrule \hrule draw a horizontal rule -hsize \hsize set the galleywidth -hof \hyphenoff turn off hyphenation -hon \hyphenon turn on hyphenation -incl \include add an external graphic -indent \indent add horizontal space -ix \index add item to index -ixf \indexformat specify the index format -input \input input another file -isk \interlineskip{} set interline skip -it \italic specify italic font -item \item unordered lists -ju \justify align margins -la \label start a label -laf \labelformat modify label style -leader \leader dot leadering -lin \leftindent{} indent left margin -lr \leftragged unaligned left margin -line \line left justify a line -lbr \linebreak cause unfilled line break -lint \lineinterval line numbering -lnf \linenumberfont line numbering -lib \listbegin start list -lie \listend end list -lif \listformat{} modify list style -lil \listlevel{} start new list level (1-7) -lir \listresume resume at previous list level -mn \marginnote print a note in the margin -mnf \marginnoteformat modify margin note style -mathdefault \mathdefault establish math fonts -mi \mathitalic call math italic font -msp \monospace typewriter printer setup -mcf \multicolumnformat modify multiple column defaults -nc \newcolumn start a new column -np \newpage start a new page -nobreak \nobreak discourage page break -nin \noindent suppress paragraph indent -nonfrenchspacing \nonfrenchspacing turn off french spacing -ntp \notitlepage suppress title page -numl \numberinglines line numbering -opm \oddpagemargin line numbering -oc \onecolumn one column formatting -pf \pageformat page size and margins -pn \pagenumber print page number -par \paragraph end paragraph -pb \paragraphbox box a paragraph -pin \paragraphindent{} set paragraph indentation -printind \printindex print the document index -psk \paragraphskip{} set space between paragraphs -part \part{} designate major heading -paf \partformat{} modify part style -plaintexmathon \plaintexmathon use PLAIN.TEX's $ -ppl \poplevel line numbering -pre \preface{} designate preliminary pages -prf \prefaceformat{} modify preface style -pen \printendnotes print accumulated endnotes -prin \printingnumbers{} line numbering -pic \putincontents1{} add to the table of contents -quad \quad add an 'em' of space -qquad \qquad add two 'em's of space -raggedbottom \raggedbottom don't align page bottoms -rin \rightindent{} indent right margin -rl \rightline{} right justify line -rlb \rightlinesbegin begin right alignment, 'as is' -rle \rightlinesend end right alignment, 'as is' -rr \rightragged unaligned right margin -rm \roman specify roman font -rule \rule create horizontal line -rff \runningfootformat{} specify running foot format -rhf \runningheadformat{} specify running head format -sau \sameauthor previous author, bibliography -sfs \selectfontset{}{}{} specify font set -sms \selectmathset{}{} specify math set -ssf \selectspecificfont{}{}{} specify specific font -san \setappendixnumber{} reset appendix number -scn \setchapternumber{} reset chapter number -senn \setendnotenumber{} reset endnote number -sfn \setfigurenumber{} reset figure number -sffn \setfootnotenumber{} reset footnote number -spn \setpagenumber{} reset page number -sptn \setpartnumber{} reset part number -ssan \setsubheadanumber{} reset subheada number -ssbn \setsubheadbnumber{} reset subheadb number -sscn \setsubheadcnumber{} reset subheadc number -ssdn \setsubheaddnumber{} reset subheadd number -stn \settablenumber{} reset table number -settabs \settabs tables -ssp \singlespace start single spacing -strut \strut tables -sha \subheada{} designate first subheading -shaf \subheadaformat{} modify first subheading style -shb \subheadb{} designate second subheading -shbf \subheadbformat{} modify second subheading style -shc \subheadc{} designate third subheading -shcf \subheadcformat{} modify third subheading style -shd \subheadd{} designate fourth subheading -shdf \subheaddformat{} modify fourth subheading style -sy \symbol call the symbol font -taf \tableformat{} modify table title style -toc \tableofcontents{} print table of contents -tocf \tableofcontentsformat{} modify table of contents style -tat \tabletitle{} print a table title -tenpt \tenpt call 10pt font set -text1 \text1 print "TEXT1" -thc \threecolumns print text in 3 columns -tp \titlepage designate title page -tpf \titlepageformat{} modify title page style -toclbr \toclinebreak cause a line break in the contents -today \today print current date -twelvept \twelvept call 12pt font set -twc \twocolumns print text in 2 columns -tt \typewriter call typewriter font -us \underscore{} underline word(s) -vbox \vbox TEX vertical box -vs \verticalspace{} leave vertical space -vsk \verticalspacekeep{} leave vertical space -vrule \vrule draw a vertical rule diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 13e28e3ece..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/marnote.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|MARNOTEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\marginnoteformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 9fe869f6a3..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mathdefa.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| mathdefault | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 establishes a 9 point font for math mode superscripts, -and a 7 point font for math mode supersuperscripts. This is the value of -\mathdefault. You can establish other math mode font combinations than 9/7 -by using the \selectmathset markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -You can establish a larger math set called \bigmath which can be used for -display math and you can switch back to \mathdefault for the text math. - -\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath} -\twelvept -\mathdefault - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index f24f22ac48..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mcf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| multicolumnformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\multicolumnformat{ - \twocolumnwidth{.48\galleywidth} - \threecolumnwidth{.31\galleywidth} - \twocolumngutter{.04\galleywidth} - \threecolumngutter{.035\galleywidth} - \columnrulewidth{0.0pt} - \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} - \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\mcfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\twocolumnwidth, \threecolumnwidth, -\twocolumngutter, \threecolumngutter, \columnrulewidth, -\skipbefore, \skipafterã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The column and gutter widths can be changed by modifying the -\multicolumnformat markup. Column widths are specified in a percentage -of the \galleywidth, the width of the text area on the page as specified -in the \pageformat markup. If the default "flexibleformat" is being used -a skip before and a skip after the multiple column format may also be -specified. These skips are ignored if you are using \fixedformat. - -ã|\twocolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify \twocolumns. -Each column will be exactly the same width. This width is the shaded area -illustrated below: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Greek man- from the fourth | -| uscripts of the to the ninth | -| Bible fall into centuries, be- | -| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the | -| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus | -| the period from and the Codex | -| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) | -| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- | -| the fourth cen- cules, from the | -| tury a.d. (2) ninth century | -| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- | -| -a form of ma- tion of print- | -| juscule (large ing, there are | -| letter)--- well over 4,000 | -| of various dates manuscripts. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|\threecolumnwidthã% is the width of each column when you specify -\threecolumns. Each column will be exactly the same width. This -width is the shaded area illustrated below: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and | -| scripts of uncials- the Codex | -| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; | -| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- | -| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- | -| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from | -| covering -of various the ninth | -| the period dates from century to | -| from the the fourth the inven- | -| third cen- to the tion | -| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- | -| to the turies, be- ing, there | -| fourth cen- ginning are over | -| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- | -| Codex Vat- scripts. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|\twocolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify -\twocolumns. The gutter is the shaded area illustrated below: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Greek man- from the fourth | -| uscripts of the to the ninth | -| Bible fall into centuries, be- | -| 3 groups (1) Pa- ginning with the | -| pyri, covering Codex Vaticanus | -| the period from and the Codex | -| the third cen- Sinaiticus; (3) | -| tury b.c. to Vellum minis- | -| the fourth cen- cules, from the | -| tury a.d. (2) ninth century | -| Vellum uncials-- to the inven- | -| -a form of ma- tion of print- | -| juscule (large ing, there are | -| letter)--- well over 4,000 | -| of various dates manuscripts. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|\threecolumngutterã% is the distance between each column when you specify -\threecolumns. Each gutter will be exactly the same width. The gutter is -the shaded area illustrated on the next page: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Greek manu- (2) Vellum icanus and | -| scripts of uncials- the Codex | -| the Bible --a form Sinaiticus; | -| fall into of majus- (3) Vel- | -| 3 groups: cule (large lum minis- | -| (1) Papyri, letter)-- cules, from | -| covering -of various the ninth | -| the period dates from century to | -| from the the fourth the inven- | -| third cen- to the tion | -| tury b.c. ninth cen- of print- | -| to the turies, be- ing, there | -| fourth cen- ginning are over | -| tury a.d. with the 4,000 manu- | -| Codex Vat- scripts. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|\columnrulewidthã% when set to a non zero value will print a rule between -each column. - -ã|\skipbeforeã% is the distance between the one column text and the multiple -column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple -columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat. - -ã|\skipafterã% is the distance between the multiple column text and the one -column text when you are using the flexible method of setting multiple -columns. The skip is ignored if you are using \fixedformat. - - ã|Example:ã% -You can also specify the column widths in units of measure, instead of a -percentage of the \galleywidth. - - \multicolumnformat{ - \twocolumnwidth{10pc} - \twocolumngutter{3pc} - \columnrulewidth{.25pt} - - \skipbefore{6pt plus3pt minus2pt} - \skipafter{6pt plus3pt minus2pt}} - - \twocolumns - Greek manuscripts of the Bible fall into 3 groups - (1) {\it Papyri}, covering the period from the third century - {\caps b.c} to the fourth century {\caps a.d}. - (2) {\it Vellum uncials}---a form of majuscule (large - letter)---of various dates from the fourth to the ninth - centuries, beginning with the {\it Codex Vaticanus} and - the {\it Codex Sinaiticus}; - (3) {\it Vellum miniscules}, from the ninth century to - the invention of printing, there are well over - 4,000 manuscripts. - \onecolumn - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Greek manu- . from the fourth | -| scripts of the . to the ninth | -| Bible fall into . centuries, be- | -| 3 groups (1) Pa- . ginning with the | -| pyri, covering . Codex Vaticanus | -| the period from . and the Codex | -| the third cen- . Sinaiticus; (3) | -| tury b.c. to . Vellum minis- | -| the fourth cen- . cules, from the | -| tury a.d. (2) . ninth century | -| Vellum uncials-- . to the inven- | -| -a form of ma- . tion of print- | -| juscule (large . ing, there are | -| letter)--- . well over 4,000 | -| of various dates . manuscripts. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -The rule between the columns will not print as long as the column rule width -is zero. - The skip before and skip after are ignored in the optional fixed column -method. The fixed column format (\fixedformat) always fills the remainder -of the current page with white space and changes to the new format on the -following page. Columns may not be balanced in \fixedformat. - The \newcolumn markup while in the flexible format estimates the -remaining space on the page at the time it is entered. If a footnote -or other insert is placed on the same page after the newcolumn markup the -length of the blank column cannot be estimated properly. In this case, -TEXT1 will issue a warning, - -overfull \vbox 12pt while \output active - -You can compensate for the footnote or insert by subtracting twice the -amount of the overfull box in two columns or three times this amount in -triple columns immediately before the newcolumn markup. For example, if the -box is overfull by 12 points and you are in two columns, enter, - -\advance\vsize by-24pt -\newcolumn -text - -or in three columns before a \newcolumn enter, - -\advance\vsize by-36pt -\newcolumn -text - -This reduces the height of the current page enough to allow space for the -insert. The height of each column must be reduced by the amount of the -overfull box warning, or twice the amount for two columns and three times -the amount for three columns. See The TEXbook for more on \advance. - If the newcolumn markup appears on the final page of the document it -may cause the balance columns routine to fail because one column is the -full height of the page. Do not change to \fixedformat after entering -\newcolumn. - - Certain line breaking penalties have been altered in the multiple column -formats. These penalties, in combination or separately, may cause a short -column if there are not a sufficient number of places specified to add extra -space, "glue." - - Single Column Penalties -\brokenpenalty=100 \clubpenalty=150 -\exhyphenpenalty=50 \hyphenpenalty=50 -\widowpenalty=150 \hbadness=1000 -\tolerance=200 - Two Columns Penalties -\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0 -\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0 -\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=6400 -\tolerance=6400 - Three Columns Penalties -\brokenpenalty=0 \clubpenalty=0 -\exhyphenpenalty=0 \hyphenpenalty=0 -\widowpenalty=0 \hbadness=9600 -\tolerance=9600 - -The penalties may be reinstated in the multiple column formats by entering -each markup with a new value in the text stream immediately after the first -call for the double or triple column markup. Refer to The TEXbook for a -discussion of the above penalties. - When formatting multiple column text and other large formatting tasks, -the user may run into trouble by calling for so many format changes that -the available memory space is overrun. If this happens reduce the number -of markup used on the page that fails to format. The numbers enclosed in -angle brackets < 1 > < 2 > < 3 > show how many pages have been completed and -are printed on the terminal screen as each page is completed. If the macro -memory was exceeded when < 3 > was the last number in the sequence you would -know that the memory was exceeded while formatting page four. Your file -will not print with this error condition. - To find the point in your document that exceeded the memory use the -markup \bye at different places in your file. This markup stops text -processing. At the point \bye doesn't prevent the error condition you know -that you have passed page 4 where the error occurred. You may then examine -the markup before the \bye for possible elimination or find other markup -that will format properly without overrunning the memory. See The TEXbook -for more on \bye. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode deleted file mode 100644 index e6362b8139..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/memo.helpmode +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|MEMOã%model is a general memo model. It is a template. You may modify it, -but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4e38e59993..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mi.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| mathitalic | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\miã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \mathitalic markup is a font change much the same as \roman or -\italic. The behavior of the math italic font is quite different from the -italic. For example, the sequence "This lengthy succession" will print -as "This lengthy succession" with \italic and "This lengthy succession with -\mathitalic. This markup is usually used in math mode. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Control sequences with {\it several -arguments} require even more {\mi precautions -than control sequences with one argument.} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Control sequences with several arguments require even more precautions | -| than control sequences with one argument. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\mathitalic does not honor interword spacing (the space between words) in a -sentence. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 238c713a5d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| marginnote | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\mnã% - -Parameters: ã|note textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Margin notes can be added to either the left or right side of a page with -the \marginnote markup. As the name indicates, margin notes are outside the -defined margin. They are produced, by default, right ragged in a 10 point -Computer Modern font in the left margin with a width of 60 points and a -gutter of 12 points. - - ã|Example:ã% -. . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. | -\marginnote{IV.7.4} -No theory, however, has unified diverse sciences of . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| . . . a General Systems Theory of geological change. No theory, | -| however, has unified diverse sciences of . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Avoid using \marginnote with \monospace. - Refer to the description of the \marginnoteformat markup to find out how -to change the \marginnote defaults. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c6bc4061c5..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/mnf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| marginnoteformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\marginnoteformat{\position{left} - \notewidth{54pt}} - \notegutter{6pt} - \everymarginnote{\tenpt\rr}} - -Abbreviation: ã|\mnfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\position, \notewidth, \notegutter, -\everymarginnoteã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The defaults for the \marginnote markup can be modified with -\marginnoteformat. - -ã|\positionã% by default places the margin note in the margin. You can have it -placed in the right margin by specifying: - -\marginnoteformat{right} - -ã|\notewidthã% is the width of the area in the margin used for printing the -margin note. - -ã|\notegutterã% is the width of the area between the margin note and the left -margin of the text. - -ã|\everymarginnote{Nested Markup}ã% can be vertical mode markup such as \right- -ragged, \leftragged, \justify, and font changes. - - ã|Example:ã% -Change the margin notes so they print in the right margin in a 7 point font -with a margin note width of 46 points. - -\sfs{cm7}{sevenpt}{default} -\marginnoteformat{\position{right} - \notewidth{46pt}} - \notegutter{1em} - \everymarginnote{\sevenpt\rm} } - -This chapter explains the fundamental steps in preparing -a file containing ordinary English text. Numerous -exercises have been interspersed throughout the -\marginnote{Well, there {\it will} be lots of exercises -eventually.} text, to clarify certain points, -or just to provide practice. - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 854d444579..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/msp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| monospace | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\mspã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Typestyles may be monospaced, where all letters are the same width, or -proportionally spaced, where letters are different widths. Typewriter -printers have only monospaced typestyles; Composing printers have both -styles available. The default typestyle for TEXT1 is Computer Modern, a -proportionally spaced typestyle for composing printers. It is not available -on typewriter printers. - The \monospace markup calls the monospaced font and adjusts many TEXT1 -block defaults to fit within the limitations of monospace. For example, -the amount of space before and after a block quote is increased to whole -baseline skips, instead of half (monospace only deals with whole lines). -References for footnotes are placed on the baseline instead of superscripted -(which is not available in monospace). - - If you specify \italic and you are using \monospace, you will get -underscores instead of italics, since most typewriter printers do not have -italics. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\monospace -As long as human institutions were large and brittle, -war was an effective way of disassembling them. -The intellectual rationalization for the continual -preparation for war is the old Roman adage: -{\it If you want peace, prepare for war.} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| As long as human institutions were large and brittle, war was an | -| effective way of disassembling them. The intellectual rationalization for | -| the continual preparation for war is the old Roman adage: If you want | -| peace, prepare for war. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Specify the \monospace markup only once. It should be the first markup in -your file. - The markup the \monospace modifies, and their new defaults are as -follows: - - * The font for the table of contents will print with \roman. - - * \raggedbottom is "on" instead of \normalbottom. - - * \paragraphskip is set to "0pt". - - * \paragraphindent is set to "36pt". - - * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \asisformat is set to "1\bl" instead - of 6 points. - - * The \skipbefore and \skipafter for \blockquoteformat is set to "1\bl" - instead of 6 points; the text is indented 36 points instead of 24 - points; the text is printed in monospace roman instead of 10 point - Computer Modern roman. - - * Figure titles are printed monospace bold instead of 10 point Computer - Modern bold. - - * Table titles are printed in monospace bold instead of Computer Modern - 12 point bold. - - * Endnotes are printed with no extra space, except paragraph skip, - between notes instead of 4 points as is the non \monospace default; The - note is printed in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10 point; - The text of the note is not indented, instead of the default 1.2em - indentation. - - * Autofootnotes are printed down instead of superscripted; Their style is - "(1)" instead of "1" in monospace roman instead of Computer Modern 10 - point; At the bottom of the page the note carries a paragraph indent of - 20 points instead of .5in. - - * Heading markup, such as \part, \chapter, \subheada, etc. are printed - in monospace instead of Computer Modern 12 point. - - * The running head is defined to use monospace instead of Computer Modern - 12 point. - -If you want to change any of the defaults for the above mentioned markup, -they must come after the \monospace markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 88473bcd09..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/multicol.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|MULTICOLã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\multicolumnformat for 2 or 3 columns. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c8463b8ade..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| newcolumn | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ncã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -When using \twocolumns or \threecolumns, there may be times when an author -wants to force TEXT1 to break a column at a point other than at the bottom -of a page. This can be done by entering the \newcolumn markup. Any -column in the double or triple column formats can be broken by inserting the -\newcolumn (\nc) markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -This was accomplished by entering the \newcolumn markup between the desired -list entries while in \twocolumns - -\twocolumns -\hangingparagraph - -Ehrlich, P. et al. 1984. {\it Cold and the Dark}. -New York: W.~Norton. -\hangingparagraph -Osborn, E. 1962. (personal message). -\newcolumn -\hangingparagraph -Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}. -New York: Harper & Row. -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Ehrlich, P. et Roszak, T. 1972. | -| al. 1984. Where | -| Cold and the the Wasteland | -| Dark. New Ends. New | -| York: York: Harper | -| W. Norton. & Row. | -| Osborn, E. 1962. | -| (personal | -| message). | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -This markup has the same effect as \newpage if you are in a printing in one -column instead of multiple columns. - If you are in multiple columns and you want to go to the next page, use -\newpage instead of \newcolumn. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 52e0ac3f16..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| noindent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ninã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Paragraph indentation can be suspended for the following paragraph by -placing a \noindent markup at the beginning of the first line. A paragraph -following a block quote or following a title is often not indented. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\lib -\lil1 the economic advantages of large-scale operations -(as shown in industrial applications) -\listlevel2 armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, -weapons and troop carriers, and personnel vehicles) -\listlevel2 military forces (the troops and support - -personnel necessary to impose policy by force) -\listend -\noindent -The cultures of industrial nations are based on -accumulations of materials. -\par -Questions about defining . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. the economic advantages of large-scale operations (as shown in | -| industrial applications) | -| a. armaments (in the form of tanks, bombers, weapons and troop | -| carriers, and personnel vehicles) | -| b. military forces (the troops and support personnel necessary to | -| impose policy by force) | -| The cultures of industrial nations are based on accumulations of | -| materials. | -| Questions about defining . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 078a6418fc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nobreak.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| nobreak | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -You can discourage TEXT1 from breaking a page at a certain point by using -\nobreak. It should be preceded either by a \verticalspace or a \paragraph. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example tells TEXT1 to keep the title "Leached Samples" on the same -page as "Table 6 gives . . . ". - -\cl{\bd Leached Samples} -\vs{\bl} -\nobreak -Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached -samples as reported by x-ray fluorescence analysis - -(XRF). Using silica content as an internal standard, -the relative amounts of each element removed can be -calculated. These too are shown in Table 6. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Leached Sample | -| | -| Table 6 gives the compositions of the leached samples as reported by | -| x-ray fluorescence analysis (XRF). Using silica content as an internal | -| standard, the relative amounts of each element removed can be calculated. | -| These too are shown in Table 6. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 73157c7f9f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/nonfrenc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| nonfrenchspacing | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 will double space after punctuation, unless the letter -prior to the punctuation is a capital letter. To make all interword spacing -the same, regardless of punctuation, you can enter the \frenchspacing -markup. This will turn off the extra spacing following punctuation for the -rest of a document or until TEXT1 sees a \nonfrenchspacing markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you had specified \nonfrenchspacing to turn off french spacing, - -\nonfrenchspacing -\bibentry - -Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes -in the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications, International. - -it might print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | -| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Compare this to the same bibliography entry printed with \frenchspacing: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Grabens, Gruss M. 1970. Mechanical Processes in the Human Geomechanism. | -| Winston: Geomedical Publications, International. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index ee4040fd74..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/np.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| newpage | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\npã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \newpage markup stops formatting the current page, leaving the remainder -blank (footnotes or bottom titles will print as expected), and starts a new -page with the text following the markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -The following example would print "Bibliography" at the top of the next -page. - -The rock should be left at the bottom, because of -the inevitability of entropic direction. -\par - -\newpage -\centerline{\bd Bibliography} -\hp -Grabens, G. 1970. {\it Mechanical Processes in -the Human Geomechanism}. Winston: Geomedical -Publications International. -\hp -Illite, I. 1911. "Picking the Philosopher's -Stone." {\it Mining Truth}. 11:455--601. - - ã|Notes:ã% -If you are in \twocolumns and you specify \newpage while in the first -column, the second column will be left blank. If you are in \threecolumns -and you specify \newpage while in the first column, the second and third -columns will be left blank. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 7a6c62959f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ntp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| notitlepage | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ntpã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, you always get a title page as the first page of your document. -If you want running titles on the first page, put the \notitlepage markup at -the top of the source. Then the first line of the \runningheadformat will -be the first line to appear at the top of the first and subsequent pages. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\ctr{\today}}}} -\notitlepage -\rightlinesbegin -J.R. Bays - -P.O. Box 2021 CS -Pullman, WA 99163 -\rightlinesend -\vs{2\bl} -\centerline{\bd Nuclear Utopia} -\vs{2\bl} -Nuclear war is unthinkable. -Limited disarmament is unworkable. -Environmental degradation is unconscionable. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| January 13, 1987 | -| | -| J.R. Bays | -| P.O. Box 2021 CS | -| Pullman, WA 99163 | -| | -| | -| Nuclear Utopia | -| | -| | -| Nuclear war is unthinkable. Limited disarmament is unworkable. | -| Environmental degradation is unconscionable. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a71e31704a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/numl.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| numberinglines | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\numlã% - -Parameters: ã|statusã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to start numbering lines for line numbering in the -margin of a document. Status is true or false. - - ã|Example:ã% -To start line numbering you enter - -\numberinglines{true} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 0b3e8cdf0b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/oc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| onecolumn | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ocã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -If you have specified \twocolumns or \threecolumns, single column text can -be formatted again by entering the \onecolumn markup. For example, if an -author wants to change from a single column to two columns he enters the -\twocolumns markup where the two column text begins and \onecolumn or \oc -markup where the single column text begins again. - - ã|Example:ã% -The \twocolumns markup places the bullets in two columns. And \onecolumn -returns text to a single column. - -\twocolumns\listbegin -\bul {\it Russia} in Eastern Europe (and in - -South America and the Caribbean) -\nc -\bul {\it China} in Tibet (and most lately in Southeast -Asia---Campuchea, and Vietnam) -\listend -\onecolumn -\noindent -Countries have tried to dominate each other -economically and militarily for thousands of years. -Reasons for this continued behavior include . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| * Russia in * China in Ti- | -| Eastern Eu- bet (and | -| rope (and in most lately | -| South Amer- in South- | -| ica and the east Asia--- | -| Caribbean) Campuchea, | -| and Vietnam) | -| | -| Countries have tried to dominate each other economically and militarily | -| for thousands of years. Reasons for this continued behavior include | -| . . . | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\onecolumn has no effect if you are already in one column. - If you are in \fixedformat, \onecolumn will do a \newpage before -starting one column formatting. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 657fa0e915..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/opm.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| oddpagemargin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\opmã% - -Parameters: ã|measurementã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to indicate where a document's line numbering is to be -printed on odd numbered pages. The default is 407.7 points from the left -edge of the paper on odd pages. - - ã|Example:ã% -To indicate that you want line numbering to start at 1 inch from the left -edge, you would enter at the beginning of your document: - -\oddpagemargin{1in} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. - Valid values for \oddpagemargin are 0 to 2 to the power of 32 points, -practical values are 5 to 860 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 851a5e290e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| partformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\partformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject\titlepage - \hrule height 0pt depth 0pt - \vfil - \centerline{\twelvept\bd - Part \partnumber} - \centerline{\twelvept\bd \parttitle} - \setchapternumber{0} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0} - \setfootnotenumber{0} - \setendnotenumber{0} - \setfigurenumber{0} - \settablenumber{0} - } - - \incontents{yes} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\pafã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \partformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the -appearance of the part title. Following are the submarkup descriptions. - -ã|numberingstyleã% allows you to change the style from Arabic numerals, the -default (1), to capital letters (A) or roman numerals (I). If you wanted -your parts in roman numerals, you would specify: - -\partformat{\numberingstyle{I}} - -ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You may -use markup such as \newpage, \dumpinsertseject \verticalspace, and \center- -line within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within -or outside of \partformat: - ã|partnumber.ã% prints the most recent part number. - ã|parttitle.ã% prints the most recent part title. - ã|hrule height 0pt depth 0pt.ã% is used to create a half title page -along with \vfil. - -ã|incontentsã% places the part title in contents (if one is printed). -Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." - - ã|Example:ã% -This example does not create a half title page. Instead the part starts a -new page, centers the title bold, and one line is skipped afterwards before -printing the text of the part. - -\partformat{\titleformat{\newpage - \cl{\bd \parttitle} - - \vs{1\bl} - }} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \partformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. See The TEXbook for more on \vfil. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 9e08994304..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PAGE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for this \monospace job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 7b17e6276d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pagep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PAGE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\pageformat, page dimensions and margins for thisã|nonã%\monospace job. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode deleted file mode 100644 index 51c7b221ef..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/paper.helpmode +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PAPERã%model is a general paper model. It is a template. You may modify -it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 1a4a9c500f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/par.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| paragraph | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\parã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -A paragraph is a composition consisting of a group of sentences dealing with -a single topic. A paragraph is commonly indicated by beginning on a new -line and indenting the first line. - The TEXT1 program is paragraph-oriented, that is, it reads an entire -paragraph before breaking it into lines. Because TEXT1 reads by paragraphs, -the \paragraph markup comes at the end of a paragraph, instead of the -beginning. Thus, to end a paragraph, enter the \paragraph markup (or a -blank line) on the last line of text or on a line by itself, which makes it -easier to spot paragraphs in the source. - - ã|Example:ã% -This sample shows the relation of text to markup. - -\psk{5pt}\pin{10pt} -I raised it in order to characterize the -essence of Sociogeology. Will Durant recognized that -civilization existed by consent of geology---subject -to change without notice. -\paragraph -The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the -geological basis of all social behavior. -It explains human behavior by empirical description -of the attributes of mineral composition. -It is most successful when it provides detailed -description of particulate phenomena and first-order -correlations with features of the physical -environment. - -One of its primary functions is to reformulate the -shaky foundations of social sciences in a way that -draws them into a modern synthesis with the hard -sciences. - -\par -This article is an outline of the codification of -Sociogeology into a branch of evolutionary geology. -The subject has an aggregate of self-sufficient . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -| | -| I raised it in order to characterize the essence of Sociogeology. Will | -| Durant recognized that civilization existed by consent of geology--- | -| subject to change without notice. | -| The definition of Sociogeology is the study of the geological basis of | -| all social behavior. It explains human behavior by empirical description | -| of the attributes of mineral composition. It is most successful when | -| it provides detailed description of particulate phenomena and first-order | -| correlations with features of the physical environment. | -| | -| One of its primary functions is to reformulate the shaky foundations of | -| social sciences in a way that draws them into a modern synthesis with the | -| hard sciences. | -| This article is an outline of the codification of Sociogeology into | -| a branch of evolutionary geology. The subject has an aggregate of | -| self-sufficient . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -A blank line also ends a paragraph. For this reason, blank lines may be -used in place of \paragraph markup. - Paragraphs are not permitted in math mode; they cause errors. Blank -lines will also cause errors in math mode. - The distance between paragraphs is determined by the \par- -agraphskip markup. The default value for \paragraphskip is -"0 points plus 3 points minus 0 points". The "plus/minus" specification -allows up to 3 additional points to be added between paragraphs to get the -bottom of each page to line up properly is you are using \normalbottom. - The indent at the beginning of each paragraph is determined by the -\paragraphindent markup. The default value for indentation is 24 points. - For a complete discussion of how paragraphs are read in and formatted, -refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 4164a4a16a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parm.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PAR-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify -\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon. -The defaults given are for \monospace jobs. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index d3d2f1de79..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/parp.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PAR-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify -\paragraphindent, \paragraphskip, \justify, or \hypenon. -The defaults given areã|notã%for \monospace jobs. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 771ae0c672..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PARTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\partformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index eee751234e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/part.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| part | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \part markup starts a new page, centers the title in 12 point Computer -Modern bold, and enters the title in the table of contents. Furthermore, -the \part markup places the part title in the center of a blank page (called -a half-title page). Parts are numbered. Each heading markup can be used as -often as necessary. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example would print the title "Human Sciences" on a half title page, -then skip to a new page where it begins the paragraph "Humanity is still - . . ." - -in order. - -\part{Human Sciences} -\newpage -Humanity is still the measure of . . . - - ã|Notes:ã% -To change how a part looks, use the \partformat markup. - If you are using \monospace, the part title is printed in monospace bold -instead of Computer Modern 12 point bold. - Each time you enter \part, the chapter number and subhead numbers are -reset to zero. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 629dae4e29..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pb.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| paragraphbox | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\pbã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Whole paragraphs can be put into a \drawbox if you use \vbox with the -\drawbox. The resulting box will extend into the left and right margins by -the sum of the \drawboxmat and \drawboxrulesize. If you use \paragraphbox{ -| . . } instead of \drawbox{\vbox{ . . . }}, the paragraph size is reduced | -such that the box will fit within the current margins. - - ã|Example:ã% -This illustrates the difference between a paragraph boxed with \paragraphbox -and \drawbox. - - \paragraphbox{{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating - Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant - - Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for - articles are assigned to and held by the authors.} - \drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena - is the research arm of Giga Geologicals, Inc. No apologies - are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. - The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy.}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| |. -| ........................................................................... |. -| . The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center |. -| . for Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for |. -| . articles are assigned to and held by the authors. |. -| ........................................................................... |. -| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig |. -| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability o |. -| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. |. -| ........................................................................... |. -| |. -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Do not use this markup if you are using \monospace. - Do not use \paragraphbox around more than one page of formatted -material. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 7c2523f3cd..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pen.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| printendnotes | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\penã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -To print the endnotes accumulated with the \autoendnote markup, use the -\printendnotes markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -To start a new page, center a title (such as "Notes"), and dump the -endnotes, enter: - -There is a well-marked division of -labor.\autoendnote{Such as it is. Things could be -different in the geological world, but they are not.} -Details of organization have evolved by an -optimization process. . . . -\newpage -\titlepage -\cl{\bd Notes} -\vs{\bl} -\printendnotes - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Notes | -| | -| 1. Such as it is. Things could be different in the geological world, but | -| they are not. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \printendnotes markup does not print the title "Note". It may be used -more than once in a paper; for example, you may want to print all endnotes -within a chapter at the end of the chapter rather than at the end of the -entire paper. The \printendnotes markup prints all endnotes accumulated up -to that point. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index a49a225f25..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| pageformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\pageformat{\pagelength{11in} - \pagewidth{8.5in} - \topmargin{1in} - \bottommargin{1in} - \leftmargin{1.2in} - \rightmargin{1in} - \bindingadjust{0pt} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\pfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\pagelength, \pagewidth, \topmargin, -\bottommargin, \leftmargin, \rightmargin, \bindingadjust, -\galleywidthã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \pageformat markup specifies the page size and margins. The dimensions -and margins for the pages of a document are set with page formatting markup. -These submarkup are valid only within the \pageformat markup. Its seven -submarkup are described below. - -ã|pagelengthã% specifies the length of the page to be used. The default -page length, 11 inches is maximum for most printers. - -ã|pagewidthã% specifies the width of the page to be used. The default -page width, 8.5 inches, is maximum for most printers. The \pagewidth -and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth -submarkup. - -ã|topmarginã% sets the distance from the top of the paper to the first line -of text, excluding the top title(s). The default value is 1 inch. - -ã|bottommarginã% sets the distance from the bottom of the paper to the last -line of the text, excluding the bottom title(s). The default value is 1 -inch. - -ã|leftmarginã% sets the distance from the left edge of the page to the left -edge of the text. The default value is 1.2 inches. - -ã|rightmarginã% sets the distance from the right edge of the page to the -right edge of the text. The default value is 1 inch. The \pagewidth -and \rightmargin submarkup may optionally be replaced with the \galleywidth -submarkup. - -ã|bindingadjustã% is used to offset left and right margins, which is useful -for duplex printing (on both sides). The value given the \bindingadjust -submarkup will increase the left margin on odd pages and decrease the left -margin on even pages. The page text width is not shortened, only the -margin. The default value is {0pt}. - -ã|galleywidthã% may be substituted for \pagewidth and \rightmargin to -determine the width of the text. The \galleywidth has the same dimension -as \hsize. You cannot use \galleywidth in the same fashion, however, as -\hsize. - - ã|Example:ã% -This custom source has 90 point (1 1/4inch) left and right margins. - -\pageformat{\leftmargin{90pt} - \rightmargin{90pt}} - - ã|Example:ã% -This custom source sets up a 9 inch by 6 inch page size. The margins have -been decreased accordingly. A binding adjust value has been added. - -\pageformat{\pagelength{9in} - \topmargin{.5in} - \bottommargin{.5in} - - \leftmargin{.6in} - \galleywidth{4.9in} - \bindingadjust{.2in} - } - - ã|Notes:ã% -Do note include \pagewidth and \rightmargin in the \pageformat markup if you -use the \galleywidth submarkup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c387a6fc35..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pic.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| putincontents | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\picnã% - -Parameters: ã|text and markupã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Major headings and the first two levels of subheadings are automatically -placed in a table of contents (if one is called). Any heading, text, or -markup can be put in the table of contents using the \putincontents markup -(abbreviated \pic). - This markup has one parameter, but that parameter can be either markup -to manipulate the table of contents itself or the text, usually a heading, -to be put in the contents. Note that in the example the page number and dot -leadering to separate it from the text were both included. - There are three levels of contents: the first (\pic1) puts text and/or -markup into the primary table of contents; \pic2 puts text and/or markup -into the list of figures; \pic3 puts text and/or markup into the list of -tables. - - Refer to the example on the next page. - - ã|Example:ã% -To create an Abstract that conforms to the Washington State University -graduate school's thesis requirements and print the abstract title in the -table of contents, enter: - -\newpage -\putincontents1{ABSTRACT\leader\pagenumber\par} -\doublespace -\vsk{6\bl} -\centerlinesbegin -\bd EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING -ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING -AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL -ABSTRACT -\singlespace -\vs{2\bl} -\rm by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D. -Washington State University, 1979 -\vs{1\bl} - -\centerlinesend -\nin Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson -\vs{1\bl} -The text of the abstract follows at this point . . . - -\pic2{LIST OF FIGURES\leader vi} -\pic3{LIST OF TABLES\leader viii} -\setpagenumber{0} -\chapter{Introduction} - -(Note, single spacing will return to double spacing after the -\centerlinesend markup, since it acts as a delimiter with -\centerlinesbegin.) - -The abstract would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| iv | -| | -| | -| EFFECTIVENESS OF PRISM TRAINING | -| ON THE IMPROVEMENT OF READING | -| AT THE FIFTH GRADE LEVEL | -| ABSTRACT | -| | -| | -| by Ray Elmer Brown, Ph.D. | -| Washington State University, 1979 | -| | -| Chairman: Lloyd B. Johnson | -| | -| The text of the abstract follows at this point . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The table of contents generated would contain: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... iii | -| ABSTRACT. . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . .....iv | -| List of Figures ... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... .vi | -| List of Tables .... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. . viii | -| Introduction .. ... . ...... . ... ... . ...... . ... ... . ..... 1 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Notice in the sample source file illustrated on the previous page that the -List of Figure's and List of Table's page numbers were manually put into the -\putincontents markup. This is the only way to have these placed into the -table of contents. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index cb2aca4f66..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| paragraphindent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\pinã% - -Parameters: ã|indentã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Throughout an entire document, paragraphs have 24 points indentation on the -first line of each paragraph. This value may be changed by modifying the -default with \paragraphindent. All following paragraphs will then exhibit -the new indent. - - ã|Example:ã% -The first paragraph indent has been set to 14 points for comparison with the -second paragraph which has a \paragraphindent of 24 points. - -\paragraphindent{14pt} -{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating - -Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant -Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for -articles are assigned to and held by the authors. -\par -\pin{24pt} -The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm -of Giga Geologicals, Inc. -No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of -experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect -company policy. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for | -| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles | -| are assigned to and held by the authors. | -| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga | -| Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of | -| experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -If you are using \monospace, it is best to define the indent in tenths of an -inch or in em's. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 9115410ad1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/plaintex.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| plaintexmathon | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup can be used to make the dollar sign ($) the valid math mode -indicator as is used in PLAIN TEX instead of the TEXT1 math mode indicator, -the at sign (@). - - ã|Example:ã% - -\plaintexmathon -$x+y=100$ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -Do not use this markup with \monospace. - If used, it should be specified at the top of your document. You will -need to use the TEX \catcode markup to change back to using the at sign as -the math mode indicator: - -\catcode'44=12 - -For more on the \catcode markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 9cba3d9d1e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| pagenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\pnã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \pagenumber markup merely places the current page number wherever the -markup appears. - - ã|Example:ã% -In running heads, \pagenumber numbers the pages. - -\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\line{\rm - \lft{Southern Bays}\rt{page \pagenumber}} - \vs{2pt} - \hrule - \vs{1\bl} - } - } - -The running head would look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Southern Bays 1 | -| ........................................................................... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want no page numbers, then enter the following: - -\runningheadformat{\bothpage{}} - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 8260c9d69e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ppl.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| poplevel | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\pplã% - -Parameters: ã|levelã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used in counting lines for line numbering in the margin of a -document. The level number is TEX's stacking level number. The default is -pop level 7. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you must change to a different pop level, 9 for example, enter: - -\poplevel{9} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 7e44bb2dbd..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/pre.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| preface | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\preã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Each preface starts a new page, centers the title in bold, and enters it in -the table of contents (if one is printed). The preface is not numbered. -Each heading markup can be used as often as necessary. - - ã|Example:ã% -\today -\preface{Acknowledgments} -I am grateful for the assistance and financial support -of the Grand Foundation for . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Acknowledgments | -| | -| I am grateful for the assistance and financial support of the Grand | -| Foundation for . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You can modify the default style for a preface with the \prefaceformat -markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 8fd4f9faf6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/preface.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|PREFACEã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\prefaceformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c0f4cde759..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| prefaceformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd \prefacetitle} - \vs{1\bl}} - \incontents{yes} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\prfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \prefaceformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the -appearance of the preface title. There are two submarkup: - -ã|titleformatã% controls the appearance of the part title banner. You -may use markup such as \newpage, \verticalspace, and \centerline within -\titleformat as Nested Markup. You may also use: - ã|prefacetitle.ã% prints the most recent preface title. - -ã|incontentsã% places the preface title in contents (if one is printed). -Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." - - ã|Example:ã% -In this example, the preface starts a new page, the title is centered in -bold, and one line is skipped afterwards. No preface is put in contents. - -\prefaceformat{\titleformat{\newpage - \cl{\bd \prefacetitle} - \vs{1\bl} - } - \incontents{no} - } - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \prefaceformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 50b159f13f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/prin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| printingnumbers | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\prinã% - -Parameters: ã|statusã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup is used to start the printing of line numbering in the margin of -a document. Status is true or false. - - ã|Example:ã% -To enable line numbers to be printed, enter: - -\printingnumbers{true} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Line numbering is only available on the phototypesetter. This markup is -ignored for all other printers. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index f149a6007e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printend.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \printendnotes (\pen) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \printendnotes (\pen) command will space down the amount specified in the -\endnoteformat{\skipbefore}} and print all accumulated endnotes. The -\printendnotes (\pen) format is: - - \printendnotes - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3f796827af..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/printind.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| printindex | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|index numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \printindex markup sorts and prints the index entries generated with the -\index markup. The \printindex markup would usually come at the end of a -document before the table of contents. This markup has the format - -\printindexN - -where N is the index number: 1, 2 or 3. By default, the index is -printed using the indent style of index in ten point Computer Modern. It -is recommended that you print the index in two columns (\twocolumns). For -a complete list of the defaults and how to modify them, refer to the -\indexformat markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -The following illustrates how to place an index at the end of a document, -after the last appendix, and before the table of contents. Assume the table -of contents is to begin on page "iv". - -\appendix{Sample Data} - -\preface{Index} -\twocolumns -\printindex1 -\onecolumns -\tableofcontents{-4} - -Using the \preface markup will start a new page with the title -"Index" at the top of the page. Then \twocolumns will begin two column -formatting (typical for indexes). Next \printindex1 will sort index "1" and -print the sorted index according to the defaults set by the \indexformat -markup. After printing the last of the index, \onecolumn will switch back -to single column mode before printing the table of contents. - - ã|Example:ã% -Sometimes multiple indexes are required. If you had used \index1 and -\index2, then you would use \printindex1 and \printindex2 to print them out: - -\index1item in first index -\index2item in second index -\preface{Index One} -\twocolumns -\printindex1 -\onecolumns -\preface{Index Two} -\twocolumns -\printindex2 -\onecolumns - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 5a665edd5e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/psk.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| paragraphskip | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\pskã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -This markup causes all following paragraphs to be separated by the new -distance. The \paragraphskip is expressed using valid units of measurement -in TEXT1. The default value is 0 points. - - ã|Example:ã% -The first two paragraphs used a paragraph skip of 10 points. The third one -used a skip of 20 points. - -\paragraphskip{10pt} -{\it The Journal of Nonrepeating -Results} is published by the Center for Unpleasant - -Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for -articles are assigned to and held by the authors. -\par -The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm -of Giga Geologicals, Inc. - -\psk{20pt} -No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of -experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect -company policy. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The Journal of Nonrepeating Results is published by the Center for | -| Unpleasant Phenomena, at Palouse, Washington. The copyrights for articles | -| are assigned to and held by the authors. | -| | -| The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Giga | -| Geologicals, Inc. | -| | -| | -| No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. | -| The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The "plus3pt" after the setting of "0pt" means that up to 3 points -additional space may be added before each paragraph, if this space is needed -to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. If the \paragraphskip is set -to "minus1pt", it implies that up to 1 point may be subtracted before each - -paragraphs if needed to fill out a page when using \normalbottom. Since the -leading is usually only 2 points more than the size of the type, the "minus" -value should not be more than 1 point. - If you are using \monospace, it is best to specify the units in blank -lines. For example, - -\paragraphskip{1\bl} - -There are 6 \bl in an inch with \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 31d6772c21..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/qquad.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| qquad | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \qquad markup leaves two quads of space. It is two em spaces in the -current type size. It can be used in text, "as is," or math mode. - - ã|Example:ã% -\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr -Changes after Nuclear Exchanges} -\vs{6pt} -\settabs\+\qquad&number\qquad&number\qquad -\+&number\qquad&number\qquad&10,000&\cr -\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr - -\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | -| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges | -| | -| | -| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | -| 3000 9 6 8 10 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - - ã|Notes:ã% - -\qquad=\horizontalspace{2em}=\quad\quad. In \twelvept, \qquad approximately -24 points; in \tenpt, \qquad approximately 20 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index ffd0b320b0..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/quad.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| quad | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -A printer's quad of space used to be a blank square of type, 1 em high and -1 em wide, equivalent in size to a capital "M." A TEXT1 quad is a unit of -horizontal space. It is one em space in the current type size. The \quad -markup can be used in text, "as is," and math mode. - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider the input for this table: - -\tat{Surface Land Temperature (degrees C)\lbr -Changes after Nuclear Exchanges} -\vs{6pt} - -\settabs\+\quad&number\quad&number\quad -\+&number\quad&number\quad&number&\cr -\+&1000&-22&8&7&13\cr -\+&3000&9&6&8&10\cr - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Surface Land Temperature (degrees C) | -| Changes after Nuclear Exchanges | -| | -| 1000 -22 8 7 13 | -| 3000 9 6 8 10 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\quad=\horizontalspace{1em}. In \twelvept, \quad approximately 12 points; -in \tenpt, \quad approximately 10 points. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index ab947ecb1e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/raggedbo.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,16 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| raggedbottom | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By default, TEXT1 tries to make the top and bottom of each page of text line -up. If you are not concerned with having the bottom of each page line up, -you can enter \raggedbottom. If you have specified \raggedbottom and you -want to go back to the default, enter \normalbottom. - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode deleted file mode 100644 index 4ffcb945d8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/resume.helpmode +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|RESUMEã%model is a general resume model. It is a template. You may modify -it, but it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 22999b573a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rff.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,129 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| runningheadformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\runningfootformat{ - \bothpages{\vs{1\bl} - \line{\twelvept\rm\lft{} - \ctr{}\rt{}}} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\rffã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \runningfootformat markup provides running titles at the bottom of all -pages except the title page. The default running bottom title for TEXT1 is -blank. - -\bothpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of both the -even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within -it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup -\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule -and \verticalspace. - -\evenpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each -even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, -you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, -\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and -\verticalspace. - -\oddpages is used to place the same running foot at the bottom of each -odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you -may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, -\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and -\verticalspace. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example prints the date and author's initials at the bottom of each -page. - -\runningfootformat{ - \bothpages{\vs{18pt} - \line{\rm\lft{\today}\ctr{}\rt{JNP}} - } - } - -which produces a running foot as illustrated on the next page. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| January 13, 1987 JNP | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This example illustrates the use of odd and even page layout with two lines. -The page number alternates sides so that it appears on the outside of the -page. The title appears above the subtitle on even pages. The author's -name appears above the journal name on odd pages. - -\runningfootformat{ - \evenpages{\line{\lft{\pagenumber} - \rt{Sociogeology}} - \vs{2pt}} - \line{\rt{A New Science}} - \vs{\bl}} - \oddpages{\line{\lft{A. Chert} - \rt{\pagenumber}} - - \vs{2pt}} - \line{\lft{SPP---UP}} - \vs{\bl}} - } - -which produces on even page numbers a running foot that looks like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 22 Sociogeology | -| A New Science | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -and produces on odd page numbers a running foot that looks like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| A. Chert 11 | -| SPP---UP | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example. - A construct such as, - -\rff{\bothpages{ - \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} - -will not print the date centered on the page: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 7 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with -\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the -date: - -\rff{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} - - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} - \vs{-\bl} - \line{\ctr{\today}}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 8 January 13, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - The \runningfootformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if -both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 28f4ce697f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rhf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| runningheadformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rhfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\bothpages, \evenpages, \oddpagesã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \runningheadformat markup provides running titles at the top of all -pages except the title page. The default running top title for TEXT1 is a -right justified page number. - -ã|bothpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of both the -even and odd pages. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within -it, you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup -\ctr, \lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule -and \verticalspace. - -ã|evenpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each -even page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, -you may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, -\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and -\verticalspace. - -ã|oddpagesã% is used to place the same running head at the top of each -odd page. The \line markup defines a single title line. Within it, you -may center, left align, or right align text, using the submarkup \ctr, -\lft, or \rt. Besides \line, you may also use markup such as \hrule and -\verticalspace. - - ã|Example:ã% -To customize running titles, you modify the \runningheadformat for the top -titles and the \runningfootformat for bottom titles. In this example, -"Sociogeology" and a page number are placed at the top of every page. - -\runningheadformat{\bothpages{\it - \line{\lft{Sociogeology}\ctr{}\rt{\pn}} - \vs{2pt} - \hrule - \verticalspace{18pt} - } -} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Sociogeology 1 | -| ........................................................................... | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This example alternates the author's name and page number at the top of even -and odd pages. It complements the last example on the previous page. - -\rhf{\evenpages{\vs{\bl} - \line{\lft{Chert}}} - \oddpages{\vs{\bl} - \line{\rt{\pagenumber}}} - } - -Even pages will look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chert | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Odd pages will look like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 4 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -An empty \lft, \ctr, or \rt may be omitted as was done in the above example. - A construct such as, - -\rhf{\bothpages{ - \line{\lft{page \pn}\ctr{\today} - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}}} - -will not print the date centered on the page: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 6 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -To accomplish this, you should print the left and right justified text with -\line, then space backwards one line (\verticalspace{-\bl}), then center the -date: - -\rhf{\bothpages{\line{\lft{page \pn} - - \rt{PNW Waterfalls}}} - \vs{-\bl} - \line{\ctr{\today}}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| page 7 February 5, 1987 PNW Waterfalls | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - The \runningheadformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if -both are used. - If you want no page numbers, then enter the following: - -\runningheadformat{\bothpages{}} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index bed41f21f2..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rin.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rightindent | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rinã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measurementã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rightindent markup adds (or subtracts) the amount from the current -right margin (default is zero). The indentation remains until another -\rightindent overrides it. This markup causes a break in text. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, -zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable -proportions. -\vs{50pt} -\lin{1in} - -\rightindent{1.5in} -{\bd Figure 2}. -Physiognomic similarities between the earth and -human beings. -\rightindent{-1.5in} -\lin{0in} -\vs{10pt} -Most elemental abundances are the same in the -lithosphere and the anthrosphere. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and | -| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. | -| | -| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between | -| the earth and human beings. | -| | -| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the | -| anthrosphere. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -The previous example could have used grouping as illustrated below and the -same output would have been generated. If you do grouping, be sure there is -a \paragraph markup before the closing right curly brace of the group. - -Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, -zinc, selenium, and copper, appearing in suitable -proportions. -\vs{50pt} -{\lin{1in} -\rightindent{1.5in} -{\bd Figure 2}. -Physiognomic similarities between the earth and -human beings. -\par -} -\vs{10pt} -Most elemental abundances are the same in the -lithosphere and the anthrosphere. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Humans also require trace amounts of manganese, zinc, selenium, and | -| copper, appearing in suitable proportions. | -| | -| Figure 2. Physiognomic similarities between | -| the earth and human beings. | -| | -| Most elemental abundances are the same in the lithosphere and the | -| anthrosphere. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 92e51079b0..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rl.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rightline | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rlã% - -Parameters: ã|text to be right justifiedã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rightline markup right justifies individual lines. This markup ends -the previous paragraph. The only parameter for this markup is text. - - ã|Example:ã% -yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have -been mixed, especially from academics. -\rightline{This theory is 'on the rocks.'} -\rl{\it Clay Gneiss} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| yet some of the reviews of "Sociogeology" have been mixed, especially from | -| academics. | -| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | -| Clay Gneiss | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4d714ff65a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rlb.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,35 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rightlinesbegin | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rlbã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rightlinesbegin markup begins right justifying all following lines. -Vertical spacing and font changes are the only markup permitted after it. -There are no parameters or markup options. End a \rightlinesbegin with a -matching \rightlinesend. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\rightlinesbegin -This theory is 'on the rocks.' -{\it Clay Gneiss} -\rightlinesend - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | -| Clay Gneiss | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend. - You cannot use \rightlinesbegin within any of the following markup: -\appendim, \autofootnote, \bibliography, \centerline, \chapter, \drawbox, -\figure, \footnote, \item, \label, \marginnote, \paragraphbox, \part, -\preface, \rightline, \runningheadformat, \runningfootformat, \subheada, -\subheadb, \subheadc, \subheadd, or \tabletitle. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4c4ec76858..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rle.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rightlinesend | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rleã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rightlinesend markup ends lines that are being right justified with -\rightlinesbegin. This markup causes a paragraph break. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\rightlinesbegin -This theory is 'on the rocks.' -{\it Clay Gneiss} -\rightlinesend - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| This theory is 'on the rocks.' | -| Clay Gneiss | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each \rightlinesbegin must be followed by a matching \rightlinesend. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index de8ed390f8..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rm.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| roman | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rmã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Roman is a medium-weight type good for reading. It is the default face for -TEXT1. It is usually specified as the default font at the beginning of a -paper, so that it will be in effect for most of the paper. Roman can also -be used to terminate the use of a special typeface, such as italic or bold. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\twelvept -\italic now! \roman It is important to realize -\it the facts! -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| now! It is important to realize the facts! | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -This example is the same as the one above, except that grouping was used to -change from the roman font back to italics. - -\tenpt -\italic now! {\roman It is important to realize} -the facts! - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| now! It is important to realize the facts! | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index af80dc37cf..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rr.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rightragged | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\rrã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rightragged markup turns off right justification. If you only want -to right justify a certain section of the document, then you would use a -combination of the \justify and \rightragged markup. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\rightragged -The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate -oversimplification comes complex obfuscation and -general theoretification. -Behavioral research will lead in this direction, as - -the general theory of Sociogeology predicts the . . . -\justify -Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high -temperatures, fever, for instance. -Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The comparison may seem facile, but from deliberate oversimplification | -| comes complex obfuscation and general theoretification. Behavioral | -| research will lead in this direction, as the general theory of | -| Sociogeology predicts the . . . | -| Humans exhibit metamorphic behavior over time or at high temperatures, | -| fever, for instance. Metamorphic crystallization involves low . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -The default values for space skips is listed below. When you are using -\monospace you get the values in the right column. - - Composing Printers Typewriter Printers - \rightskip plus 1fil plus 10em - \spaceskip .35em 1em - \xspaceskip .55em 1em diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 71a72ad0a7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/rule.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| rule | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \rule markup skips a blank line and draws a horizontal line (rule). -Rules are used to separate material, such as tables or sections. No extra -vertical space is skipped after the rule, so you may need to add some with -\vs. - - ã|Example:ã% - -\tabletitle{Elements of the Spheres} -\rule -\vs{6pt} -\tabskip 3em plus 3em minus 1em -\halign{\lft{#}&&\rt{#}\hs{20pt}\cr - -Element&\omit\ctr{Anthrosphere}&\omit\ctr{Lithosphere}\cr -Oxygen&62.1\phantom{0}&60.6\phantom{0}\cr -Hydrogen&1.1\phantom{0}&0.1\phantom{0}\cr -Aluminum&0.22&11.54\cr} -\rule -\vs{6pt} -\nin Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . . -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| Table 1 | -| Elements of the Spheres | -| | -| ........................................................................... | -| | -| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | -| Oxygen 62.1 60.6 | -| Hydrogen 1.1 0.1 | -| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 | -| ........................................................................... | -| Most elemental abundances are the same in the . . . | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -If you want a rule of a different height, depth, or width than illustrated -with \rule and if you are not using \monospace, then use \hrule. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 259d368dcb..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runfoot.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|RUNFOOTã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\runningfootformat which is carried at the bottom of every page -except the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 0dd2248ba3..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/runhead.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|RUNHEADã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\runningheadformat which is carried at the top of every page -except the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 05b9299a2c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/san.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setappendixnumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sanã% - -Parameters: ã|previous appendix numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The appendix number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \appendix. The appendix number can be reset by inserting the -\setappendixnumber markup before the next occurrence of \appendix. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first appendix is number 1. If you want to start with -appendix 5, you would enter: - -\setappendixnumber{4} -\appendix{Title of the fifth appendix} - - - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setappendixnumber parameter is the previous -appendix number, not the next appendix number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 24ce71ea8b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sau.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| sameauthor | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sauã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \sameauthor markup allows you to substitute a standard rule for an -author's name for multiple references in a bibliography. The default rule -is 3 em spaces wide; the default width may be changed in \bibliographyformat -markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -\bibliography{References Cited} -\frenchspacing -\bibentry -Roszak, T. 1972. {\it Where the Wasteland Ends}. -New York: Harper \& Row. - -\bie -Weldon, S. 1971. {\it Waging Peace}. -Wilmington: M. \&\ R. Wolfe, Limited. -\bie -\sameauthor 1983. {\it The Metaindustry: War and -Economic Development}. -Los Angeles: Thompson Books. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| References Cited | -| | -| Roszak, T. 1972. Where the Wasteland Ends. New York: Harper & Row. | -| | -| Weldon, S. 1971. Waging Peace. Wilmington: M. & R. Wolfe, Limited. | -| | -| ....1983. The Metaindustry: War and Economic Development. Los Angeles: | -| Thompson Books. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 08b572cb2d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/scn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setchapternumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\scnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous chapter numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The chapter number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of -\chapter. The chapter number can be reset by inserting the \setchapternum- -ber markup before the next occurrence of \chapter. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first chapter is number 1. If you want to start with -chapter 5, you would enter: - -\setchapternumber{4} -\chapter{Title of the fifth chapter} - - - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setchapternumber parameter is the previous -chapter number, not the next chapter number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b032b8a8d9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/senn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setendnotenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sennã% - -Parameters: ã|previous endnote numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The endnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \autoendnote. The endnote number can be reset by adding the -\setendnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an \autoendnote. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, endnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset -in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setendnotenumber -to the \titleformat: - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setendnotenumber{0} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes}} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setendnotenumber parameter is the previous -endnote number, not the next endnote number. If you want the next -\autoendnote to be endnote 90, then specify - -\setendnotenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 53b535a5e6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/settabs.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,151 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| settabs | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|number of columnsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The body of the table is created with the \settabs n \columns markup, which -establishes a number (n) of equal-size tabular columns (\columns). - Each new column after the first is indicated with the TEXT1 tab -character (&). Each row is started with the \+ markup and ended with the -\cr markup (which is an abbreviation for carriage return on typewriters). - The ampersand (&) is like the TAB key on many typewriters; it tells -TEXT1 to advance to the next tab position, where there is a tab at the right -edge of each column. But & is not exactly like a mechanical typewriter -TAB, because it first backs up to the beginning of the current column -before advancing to the next. In this way you can always tell what column -you are tabbing to, by counting the number of &s; that is handy, because - -variable-width type otherwise makes it difficult to know whether you have -passed a tab position. - The ampersands are different from tabs in another way, too: TEXT1 -ignores spaces after &, hence you can conveniently finish a column by typing -& at the end of a line in your input file, without worrying that an extra -blank space will be introduced there. Incidentally, TEXT1 also ignores -spaces after \+, so that the first column is treated like the others. - You can say \cr before you have specified a complete set of columns, if -the remaining columns are blank. The last \cr ends the settabs. No other -ending is necessary; normal text may follow. - - ã|Example:ã% - -can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. -\par -\tabletitle{Etymological Clues} -\settabs 3 \columns -\+\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr -\+boss&small rock&supervisor\cr -\+domehead&pushing through&intellectual\cr -\+fossil&turned to stone&age\cr -\+creep&move slowly&person\cr -\+streak&move quickly&naked\cr -\+ejecta&very quickly&mating\cr -\+sublimate&change to gas&dream\cr -\+trench&sediments&mouth\cr - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. | -| | -| Table 1 | -| Etymological Clues | -| | -| Term Geological Social Reference | -| boss small rock supervisor | -| domehead pushing through intellectual | -| fossil turned to stone age | -| creep move slowly person | -| streak move quickly naked | -| ejecta very quickly mating | -| sublimate change to gas dream | -| trench sediments mouth | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -You may not want all of the columns to be the same size, so there is another -way to set them, by typing "\+sample line\cr" immediately after \settabs. -In this case tabs are placed at the positions of the &s in the sample line, -but the sample line itself does not appear in the output. Look through -the table and determine the biggest entry in each column; the sample line -is then constructed by typing the widest entry in the first column, then -the widest in each subsequent column, omitting the last column. Be sure to -include some extra space (\horizontalspace{}) between columns in the sample -line, so that the columns won't touch each other. - -can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. -\par -\tabletitle{Etymological Clues} -\settabs\+\hs{4pt}&domeheads\hs{4pt} - &material pushing through - \hs{10pt}&Intellectual\cr -\+&\it Term&\it Geological&\it Social Reference\cr -\+&trench&subducted sediments&mouth\cr - -\+&dike&material holding back&female\cr -\+&domehead&material pushing through&intellectual\cr -\+&fossil&life turned to stone&age\cr -\+&cleavage&the tendency to split&bosom\cr - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| can be seen, the pool of common words is prodigious. | -| | -| Table 2 | -| Etymological Clues | -| | -| Term Geological Social Reference | -| trench subducted sediments mouth | -| dike material holding back female | -| domehead material pushing through intellectual | -| fossil life turned to stone age | -| cleavage the tendency to split bosom | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want to put something right justified (flush right) in its column, -just type \rt{text} where text is the text to be right justified; Be sure -to type & after it, so that TEX will be sure to move the information all -the way until it touches the next tab. Similarly, if you want to center -something in its column, type \ctr{text} where text is the text to be -centered. Notice also the use of \phantom in decimal alignment. - - \centerline{\bd Table 1} - \centerline{Etymological Clues} - \settabs \+\hs{20pts}&Aluminum\quad&Anthrosphere& - \hs{20pt}&Lithosphere\quad\cr - \+&\lft{Element}&\rt{Anthrosphere}& - &\rt{Lithosphere}&\cr - \+&Sodium&\rt{0.001\phantom{0}}&&\rt{0.4\phantom{000}}\cr - \+&Silicon&\rt{.0001}&&\rt{20.2\phantom{000}}\cr - \+&Aluminum&\rt{0.22\phantom{00}}&& - \rt{11.54\phantom{00}}\cr - \+&Carbon&\rt{19.1001}&&\rt{0.0202}\cr - - \+&Nitrogen&\rt{3.2205}&&\rt{.0208}\cr - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Etymological Clues | -| Element Anthrosphere Lithosphere | -| Sodium 0.001 0.4 | -| Silicon .0001 20.2 | -| Aluminum 0.22 11.54 | -| Carbon 19.1001 0.0202 | -| Nitrogen 3.2205 .0208 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -Tab positions are remembered, until they are reset with another \settabs, -regardless of text and other markup following. - The operation of tabs addresses one line at a time; this allows multiple -page tables. - You cannot use \figure, \drawbox or \paragraphbox around a \settabs. - Refer to The TEXbook for more on \phantom. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 0c3ef81afc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setfigurenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sfnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous figure numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The figure number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of -\figure. The figure number can be reset by adding the \setfigurenumber -markup before the next occurrence of \figure. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, figure numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset -in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \setfigurenumber -to the \titleformat: - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setfigurenumber{0} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes}} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setfigurenumber parameter is the previous -figure number, not the next figure number. If you want the next \figure to -be Figure 90, then specify - -\setfigurenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 369f764e65..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfnn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setfootnotenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sfnnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous footnote numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The footnote number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \autofootnote. The footnote number can be reset by adding the -\setfootnotenumber markup before the next occurrence of an autofootnote. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, footnote numbers are reset in parts. If you also want -them reset in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding -\setfootnotenumber to the \titleformat: - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setfootnotenumber{0} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes}} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setfootnotenumber parameter is the previous -footnote number, not the next footnote number. If you want the next -\autofootnote to be footnote 90, then specify - -\setfootnotenumber{89} - - The \setfootnotenumber markup has no effect on the \footnote markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 241c41268b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sfs.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| selectfontset | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\selectfontset{cm12}{twelvept}{14pt} -\selectfontset{cm10}{tenpt}{12pt} -\twelvept - -Abbreviation: ã|\sfsã% - -Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's reference, leadingã% - - ã|Description:ã% -For a typical document, you will need both a font set and a math set. -The default font set selections consist of two sets for composing printers: -\twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and \tenpt -for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. Typically, the \select- -fontset markup is placed in the front of your document. The format of this -markup is - -\selectfontset{catalog name}{user's reference name}{leading between lines} - -where catalog name is the system name for that font set. (Complete lists -of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by -looking in the Font Catalogs.) The user's reference is a name of your own -devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to -that font set. The leading is the interlineskip specification. - Users of typewriter printers use different \selectfontset markup, which -offers "standard", "underscore" (for italic), and "bold" monospaced faces. -These are the only fonts available to such printers. - Each font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called -by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: -\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), -\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). -Not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular face is -not available, a warning message will be printed. - - ã|Example:ã% -After entering the \selectfontset, - -\selectfontset{cm11}{eleven}{default} -\eleven - -each time \eleven is specified, you would be using the Computer Modern font -set at a 11 point size (cm11). The third parameter ("default") indicates -that TEXT1 will use the default value for \interlineskip, in this case 13 -points. Then, whenever you switch to bold (\bd) you would get Computer -Modern bold at a 11 point size. If you were to specify \it you would get -Computer Modern italic at 11 points. - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this example for switching from 9 point to a 8 point size. -The \eightpoint is set with \interlineskip{9pt} instead of the default -\interlineskip{10pt}, leaving less space between lines. - -\selectfontset{cm9}{ninepoint}{default} -\selectfontset{cm8}{eightpoint}{9pt} -\eightpoint - -\centerline{\ninepoint\bd Sociogeology} -\vs{12pt} -\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} -\vs{12pt} -"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Sociogeology | -| | -| by Achilles Chert | -| | -| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Again, not all font sets have all nine faces available. If a particular -face is not available, a warning message will be printed. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 4c5bb98f47..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sha.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheada | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\shaã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheada markup creates a first level subheading, which skips two -baselines, prints the title in bold type, then skips one more baseline. It -does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents -automatically. - - ã|Example:ã% -more realistic. -\subheada{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -which prints: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use \subheadaformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. - TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheada. It discourages -page breaking between the \subheada and the first line of the following -paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3cf2d51cd9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shaf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadaformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip - \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \twelvept - \bd\nin\subheadatitle - \par\nobreak - \vs{1\bl}\nobreak - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\shafã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadaformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading -title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheada is to -appear. - -ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in -Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead -numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadanumber is incremented. - -ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is -to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, -\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat -as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of -\subheadaformat: - - * \subheadanumberprints the most recent subheada number. - - * \subheadatitleprints the most recent subheada title. - -ã|\incontentsã% places the subheada title by default in the contents (if one is -printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing -to "no": - -\shaf{\incontents{no}} - - ã|Example:ã% -Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. For \subheada to -include a number like "pp.cc-aa" where "pp" is the part number, "cc" is -the chapter number, and "aa" is the subheada number, you would modify the -\subheadaformat: - -\subheadaformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \bd\partnumber.\chapternumber-\subheadanumber - \quad\subheadatitle\par - \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} - \incontents{yes} -} - -more realistic. -\par -\subheada{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -The second subheada in the third chapter of the first part would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| 1.3-2 Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \subheadaformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 6c4e302561..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shb.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadb | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\shbã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadb markup creates a second level subheading, which skips two -baselines, prints the title in italics, then skips one more baseline. It -does not begin a new page. Its title is placed in the table of contents -automatically. - - ã|Example:ã% -more realistic. -\par -\subheadb{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -which prints: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use \subheadbformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. - TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadb. It discourages -page breaking between the \subheadb and the first line of the following -paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 7c0e27505b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shbf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadbformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip - \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \twelvept - \it\nin\subheadbtitle - \par\nobreak - \vs{1\bl}\nobreak - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\shbfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadbformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading -title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadb is to -appear. - -ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in -Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead -numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadbnumber is incremented. - -ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã is used to describe how the subhead title is -to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, -\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat -as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of -\subheadbformat: - - * \subheadbnumberprints the most recent subheadb number. - - * \subheadbtitleprints the most recent subheadb title. - -ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadb title by default in the contents (if one is -printed). Printing in the table of contents can be suppressed by changing -to "no": - -\shbf{\incontents{no}} - - ã|Example:ã% -Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted -\subheadb to include a number like "pp.cc.aa.bb" where "pp" is the part -number, "cc" is the chapter number, "aa" is the subheada number, and "bb" is -the subheadb number, you would modify the \subheadbformat: - - \subheadbformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \italic - \partnumber.\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber - \quad\subheadbtitle\par - \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} - \incontents{yes} - } - - more realistic. - \subheadb{Nationalism and War} - Nationalism is directly related to war. - - Lord Acton observed that . . . - -The first subheadb in the second subheada of the third chapter of the first -part would print as: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| 1.3.2.1 Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \subheadbformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 19133b8456..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadc | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\shcã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadc markup creates a third level subheading, which skips two -baselines, prints the title in roman type, then skips one more baseline. It -does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in the table of contents -automatically. - - ã|Example:ã% -more realistic. -\subheadc{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -which prints: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use \subheadcformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. - TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadc. It discourages -page breaking between the \subheadc and the first line of the following -paragraph. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index bb7cbe0822..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shcf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadcformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip - \goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \twelvept - \rm\nin\subheadctitle - \par\nobreak - \vs{1\bl}\nobreak - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{no} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\shcfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadcformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading -title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadc is to -appear. - -ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in -Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead -numbers are not printed, even though the \subheadcnumber is incremented. - -ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the \subheadc title -is to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, -\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat -as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of -\subheadcformat: - - * \subheadcnumberprints the most recent subheadc number. - - * \subheadctitleprints the most recent subheadc title. - -ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadc title in the contents (if one is printed). -By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table -of contents can be included by changing to "yes": - -\shcf{\incontents{yes}} - - ã|Example:ã% -Some applications require the subheads to be numbered. If you wanted -\subheadc to include a number like "Section cc:" where "cc" is a bold -subheadc number, you could modify the \subheadcformat: - -\subheadcformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \nin\bd Section \subheadcnumber: - \quad\subheadctitle\par - \nobreak\vs{1\bl}\nobreak} - \incontents{no} -} - -more realistic. -\subheadc{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -The third subheadc would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| Section 3: Nationalism and War | -| | -| Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord Acton observed that | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \subheadcformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fa6cb2feaa..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shd.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,33 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheadd | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\shdã% - -Parameters: ã|titleã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheadd markup creates a fourth level subheading, which skips to a new -paragraph, prints the title in italics followed by a period, then continues -the paragraph. It does not begin a new page. Its title is not placed in -the table of contents automatically. - - ã|Example:ã% -more realistic. -\subheadd{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that . . . - -which prints: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| Nationalism and War. Nationalism is directly related to war. Lord | -| Acton observed that . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use \subheaddformat to change any of the above mentioned defaults. - TEXT1 will encourage page breaking before a \subheadd. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 39b552a430..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/shdf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,77 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| subheaddformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\goodbreak - {\twelvept - \it\subheaddtitle.} - \incontents{no} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\shdfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\numberingstyle, \titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \subheaddformat markup lets you change the appearance of the subheading -title. There are three submarkup that control how the \subheadd is to -appear. - -ã|\numberingstyleã% by default is 1 which will print the subhead number in -Arabic numbers. Other possibilities are "A" and "I". By default, subhead -numbers are not printed, even though the \subheaddnumber is incremented. - -ã|\titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% is used to describe how the subhead title is -to be printed. You may use markup such as \newpage, \removelastskip, -\goodbreak, \nobreak, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \titleformat -as Nested Markup. Other markup you may use within or outside of -\subheaddformat: - - * \subheaddnumberprints the most recent subheadd number. - - * \subheaddtitleprints the most recent subheadd title. - -ã|\incontentsã% places the subheadd title in the contents (if one is printed). -By default, the title is not placed in the contents. Printing in the table -of contents can be included by changing to "yes": - -\shdf{\incontents{yes}} - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted a subhead to place the title in a lable, you would modify the -\subheaddformat: - -\subheaddformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\removelastskip\goodbreak\vs{2\bl} - \label{\subheaddtitle} - } - \incontents{no} -} - -more realistic. -\subheadd{Nationalism and War} -Nationalism is directly related to war. -Lord Acton observed that the increase in nationalism -significantly increases a country's ability to -protect itself . . . - -The fourth subheadd would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| more realistic. | -| | -| | -| | -| Nationalism | -| and War thatonthesmincreaseeinlynationalism significantlyctincreasesea | -| country's ability to protect itself . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \subheaddformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both -are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 63213a1656..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sms.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| selectmathset | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\selectmathset{cm97m}{mathdefault} -\mathdefault - -Abbreviation: ã|\smsã% - -Parameters: ã|catalog name, user's referenceã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \selectmathset markup loads type for use by math mode. Superscripted -footnotes, and mathematical equations, require the TEXT1 math mode. For -composing printers, the default for the primary (script) math set that is -used to set super or subscripts is a 9 point Computer Modern, the secondary -(script-script) math set which is used to set super-super or sub-subscripts -is 7 point Computer Modern. TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math -mode. The format of this markup is - -\selectmathset{catalog name}{user's reference name} - -where catalog name is the system name for that math set. (Complete lists -of the catalog names can be found by going to the TEXT1 help menu, or by -looking in the Font Catalogs.) The design of this name is such that the -first digit(s) is the primary (script) size, the second digit(s) is the -secondary (script-script) size. The user's reference is a name of your own -devising. This name, when prefaced with a backslash will give you access to -that math set. - Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your -document with your \selectfontset markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -This math mode example uses a primary 14 point math font, instead of the -default, and a secondary math font of 12 point. - -\selectmathset{cm1412m}{bigmath} -\selectfontset{cm18}{bigfont}{default} -\bigfont -\bigmath -Human intelligence became possible when -@@C_{14}\to C_{1.4 \bullet 10^6}@@ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Typically, the \selectmathset markup is placed in the front of your document -with your \selectfontset markup. - TEXT1 typewriter printers do not support math mode. - Only the super and subscripts are affected by the math mode fonts -selected with the \selectmathset markup. - See The TEXbook for more on math mode. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 48597c9326..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/special.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Special Characters | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -In TeX there are 10 keyboard characters which have special meaning. They are: - - \ (backslash) } (right curly brace) { (left curly brace) - @ (at sign) # (pound sign) _ (underscore) - & (ampersand) % (percent sign) ~ (tilde) | (vertical bar) - -If you need any of these characters as part of your text you must precede all -but the tilde and vertical bar with a \ (backslash) or TeX will interpret them -as a TeX command. To print a tilde you must enter \tilde and for a vertical bar -enter \vbar. - -For example, the following input: - - Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5\# potatoes, a - half gallon of 2\% milk and two packages of M\&Ms. - -would result in: - -Mom sent Tommy to the store and told him to buy 5# potatoes, a half gallon of -2% milk and two packages of M&Ms. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 8377cd9a4a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/spn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,46 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setpagenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\spnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous page numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \setpagenumber markup resets the page number of a paper. The first page -of a document, commonly referred to as the title page, is treated as page -number "1". You can begin the document with a page number other than 1, or -renumber sections of the document. - The \setpagenumber markup can be specified anywhere in your document. -It changes the number of the current page. This can be particularly useful -if you are printing your document one part or chapter at a time. - To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a -negative number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}. - - ã|Example:ã% -To set the page number so that the sentence beginning "Furthermore . . . " -is on page 11, enter - -as shown in this series of figures. -% insert four full-page figures -\setpagenumber{10} -\newpage -Furthermore, there are too many physical -similarities between human forms and earth forms -to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . . - - You could also have placed the \setpagenumber markup after the \newpage -and changed the number from 10 to 11: - -as shown in this series of figures. -% insert four full-page figures -\newpage -\setpagenumber{11} -Furthermore, there are too many physical - -similarities between human forms and earth forms -to dismiss. Indeed, they are made of the same . . . - - ã|Notes:ã% -To get pages in lower case roman numerals, for lead pages, enter a negative -number, for instance \setpagenumber{-1}. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fb40c3ae20..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sptn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,23 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setpartnumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sptnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous part numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The part number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of -\part. The part number can be reset by inserting the \setpartnumber markup -before the next occurrence of \part. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first part is number 1. If you want to start with part 5, -you would enter: - -\setpartnumber{4} -\part{Title of the fifth part} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setpartnumber parameter is the previous part -number, not the next part number. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 6b4085cc82..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssan.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setsubheadanumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ssanã% - -Parameters: ã|previous subheada numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The subheada number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \subheada. The subheada number can be reset by inserting the -\setsubheadanumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheada. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first subheada is number 1. If you want to start with -number 5, you would enter: - -\setsubheadanumber{4} -\subheada{Title of the fifth subheada} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setsubheadanumber parameter is the previous -subheada number, not the next subheada number. - The subheada number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter or -\appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index df728a0689..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssbn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setsubheadbnumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ssbnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous subheadb numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The subheadb number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \subheadb. The subheadb number can be reset by inserting the -\setsubheadbnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadb. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first subheadb is number 1. If you want to start with -number 5, you would enter: - -\setsubheadbnumber{4} -\subheadb{Title of the fifth subheadb} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setsubheadbnumber parameter is the previous -subheadb number, not the next subheadb number. - The subheadb number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, -\subheada, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index c6db33d4e0..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sscn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setsubheadcnumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sscnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous subheadc numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The subheadc number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \subheadc. The subheadc number can be reset by inserting the -\setsubheadcnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadc. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first subheadc is number 1. If you want to start with -number 5, you would enter: - -\setsubheadcnumber{4} -\subheadc{Title of the fifth subheadc} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setsubheadcnumber parameter is the previous -subheadc number, not the next subheadc number. - The subheadc number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, -\subheada, \subheadb, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b93175860c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssdn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| setsubheaddnumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ssdnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous subheadd numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The subheadd number will be automatically incremented by one for each -use of \subheadd. The subheadd number can be reset by inserting the -\setsubheaddnumber markup before the next occurrence of \subheadd. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, the first subheadd is number 1. If you want to start with -number 5, you would enter: - -\setsubheaddnumber{4} -\subheadd{Title of the fifth subheadd} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \setsubheaddnumber parameter is the previous -subheadd number, not the next subheadd number. - The subheadd number is reset to zero when you enter \part, \chapter, -\subheada, \subheadb, \subheadc, or \appendix. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 1d7173e845..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| selectspecificfont | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ssfã% - -Parameters: ã|catalog name, font size, leadingã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \selectspecificfont markup permits you to include fonts that are not -members of sets or families, and have an \interlineskip associated with it. -The format of this markup is, - -\selectspecificfont{catalog name}{font size}{leading} - -where catalog name is the system name for that font without the font size -specification. (Complete lists of the catalog names can be found by going -to the TEXT1 help menu, or by looking in the Font Catalogs.) The font -size is the size in points of that face. The leading is the interlineskip - -specification. You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with -\selectfontset. - To access a specific font made available with \selectspecificfont, you -enter a backslash, followed by the catalog name, followed by the font size, -and ending with a semicolon. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example makes the Computer Modern Slanted font at 12 points available -for use. After specifying, - -\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt} - -you would then enter "\cmsl12;" to use this font. For example, - -\selectspecificfont{cmsl}{12}{14pt} -\twelvept -\cl{\cmsl12; Nuclear Utopia} -Nuclear war is unthinkable. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Nuclear Utopia | -| Nuclear war is unthinkable. | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -Each font specified with \selectspecificfont must be followed by a -semicolon. - You cannot use "default" for the leading as you can with \selectfontset. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index bb69c58d75..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/ssp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| singlespace | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\sspã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Single spacing is the default for TEXT1. The \singlespace markup can -be used to return to single spacing if the spacing has been changed -double spacing with \doublespace. The markup \singlespace markup has no -parameters, and causes an end-of-paragraph, forcing the following text into -a new paragraph. - - ã|Example:ã% -\doublespace -The cultures of industrial nations are based on -unethical accumulations of materials. -This inequality is maintained by power, not -persuasion. -\singlespace -Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved -except by war. -Questions about defining the best nation or the best -religion lead to organized . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The cultures of industrial nations are based on unethical | -| | -| accumulations of materials. This inequality is maintained by power, | -| | -| not persuasion. | -| Power politics makes problems that cannot be solved except by war. | -| Questions about defining the best nation or the best religion lead to | -| organized . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The interline skip value used with \singlespace and \doublespace is set with -the \interlineskip markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 94fe79e895..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/stn.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| settablenumber | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\stnã% - -Parameters: ã|previous table numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The table number will be automatically incremented by one for each use of -\tabletitle. The table number can be reset by adding the \settablenumber -markup before the next occurrence of \tabletitle. - - ã|Example:ã% -By default, table numbers are reset in parts. If you also want them reset -in chapters, you could modify the \chapterformat by adding \settablenumber -to the \titleformat: - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \settablenumber{0} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - \incontents{yes} } - - ã|Notes:ã% -The number specified in the \settablenumber parameter is the previous table -number, not the next table number. If you want the next \tabletitle to be -Table 90, then specify - -\settablenumber{89} diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 582344ae8a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/strut.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| strut | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -There are times when it is necessary to have the baselineskip between two -lines be the same, especially if you are building a table that uses rules -between columns. The \strut markup can be used in an \halign to maintain -consistent distance between lines of a table. The \strut markup has no -parameters. Its height is 1.8 times the height of an "x" in the current -point size. Its depth is .6 times the height of an "x" in the current point -size. - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this table created without the use of \strut, - -\sfs{cm8}{eightpt}{default} - -\twelvept - - -\tabletitle{Comparison of the composition of goat's -milk and that of two common breeds of dairy cows} -{\offinterlineskip\eightpt -\halign{\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&& - \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr -\noalign{\hrule} -&&\bd Total&&&\cr -\bd Source of milk&\bd Water&\bd Solids& - \bd Fat&\bd Protein&\bd Lactose\cr -\noalign{\hrule height 1pt} -Goats&82.02\%&11.98\%&3.50\%&3.13\%&4.55\%\cr -\noalign{\hrule} -Holstein-Friesian&87.50\%&12.50\%&3.55\%&3.42\%&4.86\%\cr -\noalign{\hrule} -Jersey&85.31\%&14.69\%&5.18\%&3.86\%&4.94\%\cr -\noalign{\hrule} - -}} -\twelvept - -which prints as: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds | -| of dairy cows | -| ...................................................... | -| ....................................................... | -| ....................................................... | -| .Jersey...........85.31%..14.69%5.18%..3.86%...4.94%... | -| ...................................................... | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Now add \strut to the \halign preamble, - -\halign{\strut\vrule\hs{3pt}\lft{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule&& - \hs{3pt}\ctr{#}\hs{3pt}\vrule\cr - -and notice the uniform distance between lines: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 2 | -| Comparison of the composition of goat's milk and that of two common breeds | -| of dairy cows | -| ...................................................... | -| . . Total . . . . | -| ....................................................... | -| Goats 82.02%11.98% 3.50% 3.13% 4.55% | -| ..Holstein-Friesia87.50%..12.50%3.55%..3.42%...4.86%.. | -| ....................................................... | -| ....................................................... | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The size of the strut changes as the interline skip changes. \twelvept will -have a longer \strut than will \tenpt. - See The TEXbook for more on \offinterlineskip. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index e7e95f9a4d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheada.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|SUBHEADAã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\subheadaformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 9504d6e77b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadb.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|SUBHEADBã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\subheadbformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 9d092ec196..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadc.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|SUBHEADCã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\subheadcformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 92786990ed..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/subheadd.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|SUBHEADDã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\subheadDformat. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 1cd81220f6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/sy.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| symbol | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\syã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \symbol markup sets the face to the Computer Modern Math Symbol face. -Refer to The TEXbook, Appendix F, for a complete list of the characters -available in the Symbol face. - - ã|Example:ã% -This example uses \symbol to print a diagonal arrow: - -Put a {\symbol\char'45} next to . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Put a \ next to . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -For more on the use of the \char markup, refer to The TEXbook. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 81d335148d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablem.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|TABLE-Mã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\tableformat. This is to be used when you are using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index 292d726559..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tablep.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|TABLE-Pã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\tableformat. This is to be used when you areã|notã%using \monospace. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index afa15b556b..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/taf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| tableformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\tafã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\titleformat, \incontentsã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \tableformat markup allows you to modify the defaults that control the -appearance of the table title. - -ã|titleformat{Nested Markup}ã% controls the appearance of the table title. -You may use markup such as \blockquotebegin, \hangingparagraph, \vertical- -space, and \centerline within \titleformat as Nested Markup. Other markup -you may use within or outside of \tableformat: - ã|tablenumber.ã% prints the most recent table number. - ã|tabletitle.ã% prints the most recent table title. - -ã|incontentsã% places the table title in contents (if one is printed). -Printing can be suppressed by changing to "no." - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted a table title to print in a hanging paragraph style, and you -didn't want the table title put in the table of contents, enter: - -\tableformat{% - \titleformat{\bqb\hp\bd Table \tablenumber. - \rm\tabletitle\bqe} - \incontents{yes} - } - -\tabletitle{Size data of a Yellow -Transparent fruit during the period of July 23 to August 9, -1977. (fruit No. IV@_b@)} -\halign{\qquad\ctr{#}&&\hs{1em}\ctr{#}\cr -July 23&July 27&July 31&August 5&August 9\cr -32&67&44&47&18\cr} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| Table 1. Size data of a Yellow Transparent fruit during the | -| period of July 23 to August 9, 1977. (fruit No. IV[b]) | -| | -| July 23 July 27 July 31 August 5 August 9 | -| 32 67 44 47 18 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \tableformat markup must come after the \monospace markup, if both are -used. If you are using \monospace, the only difference in defaults is that -the table title is printed in the \monospace font instead of \twelvept. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index b6d310e084..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/talaris.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|TALARISã%block is to be selected if you want to change the default -proportional space fonts and you are using a Talaris. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index d5f13ab97a..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tat.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| tabletitle | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\tatã% - -Parameters: ã|title textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -A table is a presentation of information in columns. The \tabletitle markup -centers the title and puts that title in the table of contents. The -\tabletitle markup does not print the actual table, you must use \halign or -\settabs to accomplish that. - - ã|Example:ã% -\tabletitle{Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries\lbr -for 1981} -\tenpt -\halign{\quad\lft{#}&&\quad\ctr{#}\cr -\noalign{\hrule\vs{3pt}} - -&&\ctr{\bd Library Aide}&\ctr{\bd Page}\cr -\omit\ctr{\bd City/Town}&\ctr{\bd Librarian}& - \ctr{\bd and Clerical}&\ctr{\bd and}\cr -\omit\ctr{\bd Libraries}&\ctr{\bd (a)(b)}& - \ctr{\bd Assistant}&\ctr{\bd Bookbinder}\cr -Brewster&190&---&---\cr -Burlington&1158&5.89 hr&3.35/3.50 hr\cr -Castle Rock&300&3.35 hr&---\cr -Cathlamet&225&---&---\cr -Chewelah&290&---&---\cr -Cle Elum&3.50 hr&---&---\cr -Colville&5.68 hr&5.00 hr&---\cr -} - -which prints the table illustrated on the following page. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Table 1 | -| Monthly Salaries in Public Libraries | -| for 1981 | -|.............................................................................| -| Library Aide Page | -| City/Town Librarian and Clerical and | -| Libraries (a)(b) Assistant Bookbinder | -| Brewster 190 --- --- | -| Burlington 1158 5.89 hr 3.35/3.50 hr | -| Castle Rock 300 3.35 hr --- | -| Cathlamet 225 --- --- | -| Chewelah 290 --- --- | -| Cle Elum 3.50 hr --- --- | -| Colville 5.68 hr 5.00 hr --- | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -\tabletitle only prints the table title in the text and places the title -in the table of contents. Use \halign or \settabs to construct the table -itself. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 0ee2d7e6b9..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tenpt.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| tenpt | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1 -file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and -\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. - The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called -by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: -\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), -\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size. - -\tenpt -\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology} -\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} -"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Sociogeology | -| by Achilles Chert | -| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -There are some markup, such as \figure, \blockquotebegin, \autoendnote, and -\autofootnote which use \tenpt in formatting. If you decide you want to use -another 10 point font set (like Plantin) instead of Computer Modern as the -default, you must give that set the same name, "tenpt": - -\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default} -\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default} -\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault} -\tenpt diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index cfb0983202..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/text1.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| text1 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -You can print the name of the TEXT1 system by entering the markup \text1. - - ã|Example:ã% -\appendix{\text1\ Markup} -Following is the list of markup for \text1. -\twc -\aib -appendix -asisbegin -asisend -\aie -\oc - -will print an appendix that looks like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 2 | -| | -| Appendix A | -| TEXT1 Markup | -| Following is the list of markup for TEXT1. | -| | -| appendix | -| asisbegin | -| asisend | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You must follow \text1 with a required space (either a tilde ~ or with -a backslash-space, if you want a space following \text1 as indicated in -the example above in the \appendix markup. If you do not need a space -following, such as at the end of the sentence illustrated in the second line -of the example above beginning "Following is . . . ", then omit the space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index dc34bb186e..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| threecolumns | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\thcã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \threecolumns markup formats text in three identical width columns. -Column widths, gutters and margins are calculated automatically. The -default column width is 31% of the galleywidth (hsize). The default gutter -between each column is 3.5% of the galleywidth. - The Flexible format (the default) allows the user to use single column, -two column, and three column text interchangeably on the current page by -entering one of the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The -flexible format will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns -changes. - For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by -typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it -is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These -instructions can be inserted at any point on the page. - The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by -returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately -before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately -after the table. - All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the -full single column width that prints across the top of the current page. -Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page. - - ã|Example:ã% -\threecolumns -\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has -its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah. -Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the -northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more -polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and -power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the -ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the -Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris -Rivers on the easy, the mountains -of Armenia on the north, -and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first -character, N . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Hebrew is rougher approximately. | -| called Aramaic, the Mediter- | -| a Semitic and to the ranean Sea | -| language southern, on the west, | -| because more pol- the Euphrates. | -| it has its ished Ara- and Tigris | -| roots in bic. It Rivers on | -| Shem, one has a the easy, | -| of the sons freshness, sim- the mountains. | -| of Noah. plicity and of Armenia | -| Viewing power that on the north,. | -| Jerusalem few modern and the coast. | -| as its cen- languages pos Arabia on | -| ter, it is sess. Bounds the south. | -| related to of the an- Consider the | -| the north- cient Semitic first char- | -| ern, tongue were acter, N | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat -markup. - You cannot specify \threecolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox, -\paragraphbox, or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat, -are ok). - If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of -across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode deleted file mode 100644 index 5d43b13234..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/thesis.helpmode +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Models | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|THESISã%model is a thesis model set up to abide by all of the WSU -graduate school's rules. It is a template. You may modify it, but -it is recommended you check with the Information Center first. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc deleted file mode 100644 index dd15e332b0..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/titlepg.helpbloc +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 Select Formatting Blocks | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Theã|TITLEPGã%block is to be selected if you want to modify the -\titlepageformat for changing the way a title page is printed. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index dd9d895ec7..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| tableofcontents | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\tocã% - -Parameters: ã|page numberã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \tableofcontents markup prints the table of contents, beginning with -the designated page. A roman numeral page number is specified by entering -a negative page number. This markup must always appear at the end of a -document. - By default, parts, chapters, appendices and subheading levels "A" and -"B" are included in the table of contents. The order of printing in the -table of contents is always - 1. table of contents - 2. list of figures - 3. list of tables - The list of figures will print only if a \figure markup was used. The -list of tables will print only if a \tabletitle markup was used. - - ã|Example:ã% -To print the table of contents beginning on page 32 enter: -of utmost importance. -\tableofcontents{32} - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the table of contents to begin on roman numeral page three -("iii"), you would enter a minus three. - -New York: Halstead Press. -\tableofcontents{-3} - - ã|Notes:ã% -This markup must always appear at the end of a document. - Multiple line titles may be broken in the table of contents by using -\toclinebreak. - diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index f178e50e3c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tocf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,478 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| tableofcontentsformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\tocfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã| \toctitle, \prefacetocformat, \parttocformat, -\continuechapter, \chaptertocformat, -\hangingchapterindent, \appendixtocformat, -\hangingappendixindent, \subheadatocformat, -\subheadbtocformat, \subheadctocformat, -\subheaddtocformat, \bibliographytocformat, -\figuretoctitle, \figuretocformat, -\hangingfigureindent, \tabletoctitle, -\tabletocformat, \hangingtableindentã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The table of contents prints with the titles "Table of Contents", "List of -Figures", and "List of Tables" centered in bold letters and each beginning - -on a new page. If you want to change these defaults you use the \table- -ofcontentsformat markup. This markup also changes the way part, chapter, -subhead, appendix, bibliography, preface, figure and table titles print in -table of contents. - -ã|toctitleã% regulates how the table of contents title is to be printed. By -default it is a centered bold title "Table of Contents". Use \toctitle to -change this default. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the title of the table of contents to print "Contents" you -would enter: - -\tableofcontentsformat{ - \toctitle{\cl{\it Contents}}} - -ã|prefacetocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \preface markup -are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply printed -with a \noindent. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the preface title to print in italics as illustrated on the -next page, you would enter: - -\tocf{\prefacetocformat{\nin\it - \prefacetitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|parttocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \part markup are to -print in the table of contents. By default, part titles skip one line, -center the part number, center the part title, skip another line, then print -"Part" followed by the part number again, followed by leader and the page -number: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Part 1 | -| Mechanics | -| | -| Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% - -If you wanted parts to print in a hanging paragraph style, enter: - -\tocf{\parttocformat{\hp\parttitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Videodiscs in today's modern office --- Timely | -| TV Tutors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|continuechapterã% if specified as "yes" will print "Chapter" at the top of -each page under the header. The default is "no". - -ã|chaptertocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a chapter title is to be -printed in the table of contents. By default, the chapter number and title -are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered, - -\chapter{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr -best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} - -you would get in the table of contents: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in the -table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which is to occur -in the table of contents. To change the amount of indent, use the -\hangingchapterindent. You may use markup such as \newpage, \chaptertitle, -\chapternumber, \verticalspace, and \centerline within \chaptertocformat as -Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingchapternumber, which prints the -chapter number in a similar fashion as \item. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted chapter titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without -an associated chapter number, you would enter: - -\tocf{\chaptertocformat{\hp\chaptertitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want the title "Chapter" to appear left justified in the table of -contents above the first chapter number, prior to the first chapter you -would enter the following \putincontents markup: - -\putincontents1{\nin Chapter} -\chapter{First Chapter} -Text of the first chapter . . . - -which prints in the table of contents as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. First Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|hangingchapterindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the -chapter title when you print using \hangingchapternumber. - -ã|appendixtocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how an appendix title is to -be printed in the table of contents. By default, the appendix number and -title are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered, - -\appendix{The Nineteenth Century and after\lbr -best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} - -you would get in the table of contents: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| A. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Note that the line break from \lbr only occurs in the text, not in -the table of contents. Use \toclbr to create a line break which -is to occur in the table of contents. To change the amount of -indent, use the \hangingappendixindent. You may use markup such as -\newpage, \appendixtitle, \appendixnumber, \verticalspace, and \center- -line within \appendixtocformat as Nested Markup. You may also use -\hangingappendixnumber, which prints the chapter number in a similar fashion -as \item. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted appendix titles to print in a hanging paragraph style, without -an associated appendix number, you would enter: - -\tocf{\appendixtocformat{\hp\appendixtitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want the title "Appendix" to appear left justified in the table of -contents above the first appendix number, prior to the first appendix you -would enter the following \putincontents markup: - -\putincontents1{\nin Appendix} -\appendix{First Appendix} -Text of the first appendix . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Appendix | -| A. First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|hangingappendixindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the -appendix title when you print using \hangingappendixnumber. - -ã|subheadatocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheada to -be block indented 1/2 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadatocformat to -change this default. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite | -| make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -To have subheada titles indented 1/4inch and printed with a hangingindent, -enter: - -\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{.25in} - \hp\subheadatitle \leader \pagenumber}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't quite make | -| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|subheadbtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadb to -be block indented 1 inch from the left margin. Use \subheadbtocformat to -change the default illustrated here: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't | -| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -To have subheadb titles indented /4 inch and printed with a hangingindent -prefaced with "cc.aa.bb" where cc is the chapter number, aa is the subheada -number and bb is the subheadb number, enter: - - \tocf{\subheadbtocformat{\leftindent{.25in} - \hp\chapternumber.\subheadanumber.\subheadbnumber - \quad\subheadbtitle \leader \pagenumber}} - - The first \subheadb in the second \subheada of the first chapter would -print in the table of contents as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 | -| 1.2.1 Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They | -| don't quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|subheadctocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadc to -be block indented 11/2inch from the left margin. Use \subheadctocformat to -change this default. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange .. . ...... . .. .. .. . ...... . .. .. .. . .....15 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They | -| don't quite make it yet .... . . ..... . . ..... . . ....15 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -To have subheadc titles indented 3/4inch and printed in italics, enter: - -\tocf{\subheadctocformat{\leftindent{.75in} - \nin\italic - \subheadctitle \leader \pagenumber}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: They don't | -| quite make it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|subheaddtocformatã% by default prints all titles entered with \subheadd to -be block indented 2 inches from the left margin. Use \subheaddtocformat to -change this default. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: | -| They don't quite make | -| it yet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -To have subheadd titles indented 2 inches, printed with a hangingindent in a -10 point Computer Modern italic font, and no page number, enter: - -\tocf{\subheadatocformat{\leftindent{2in} - \hp\tenpt\italic - \subheaddtitle}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Chapter | -| 1. Document Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 | -| Micro-to-Mainframe Links: | -| They don't quite make it yet | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|bibliographytocformatã% determines how titles entered on the \bibliography -markup are to print in the table of contents. By default, they are simply -printed with a \noindent like prefaces. Use \bibliographytocformat to -change this default. - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the preface title to print in bold, you would enter: - -\tocf{\bibliographytocformat{\nin\bold - \bibtitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ã|Bibliographyã%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|figuretoctitleã% determines how the list of figures is to print. By -default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Figures", and -then print a header above the first figure, which in the example below had -the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 43: -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 21 | -| List of Figures | -| Figure Page | -| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 43 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the list of figures to print the title "Illustrations" instead -of "List of Figures" after skipping to a new page, enter - -\tocf{\figuretoctitle{\newpage - \cl{\bd Illustrations} - \line{Figure\rt{Page}}}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Illustrations | -| Figure Page | -| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun ... . ... ... . .....43 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|figuretocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a figure title is to be -printed in the table of contents. By default, the figure number and title -are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered: - -\figure{\halfpage}{The Nineteenth Century -and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} -the figure title would print in the contents as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingfigureindent. You may -use markup such as \figuretitle and \figurenumber, within \figuretocformat -as Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\figurenumber} which -prints the figure number in a similar fashion as \item. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted figure titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced -with the figure number, you would enter: - -\tocf{\figuretocformat{\hp - \figurenumber\quad\figuretitle\leader\pn}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|hangingfigureindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the -figure title when you print using: - -\hangingnumber{\figurenumber} - -ã|tabletoctitleã% determines how the list of tables is to print. By -default, it will start a new page, center the title "List of Tables ", and -then print a header above the first table, which in the example below had -the title "Hot times . . . " and printed on page 55: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| List of Tables | -| Table Page | -| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted the list of tables to print the title "Tables" after skipping -to a new page, enter - -\tocf{\tabletoctitle{\newpage - \cl{\bd Tables} - \line{Table\rt{Page}}}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Tables | -| Table Page | -| 1. Hot times in the land of the midnight sun . . . . . . . . . . . 55 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|tabletocformat{Nested Markup}ã% determines how a table title is to be -printed in the table of contents. By default, the table number and title -are printed in a hanging number style. For example, if you entered: - -\tabletitle{The Nineteenth Century -and after best-sellers\toclbr and steady-sellers} -the table title would print as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - To change the amount of indent, use the \hangingtableindent. You may -use markup such as \tabletitle and \tablenumber, within \tabletocformat as -Nested Markup. You may also use \hangingnumber{\tablenumber}, which prints -the table number in a similar fashion as \item. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you wanted table titles to print in a hanging paragraph style prefaced -with "cc.tt" where cc is the chapter number and tt is the table number, you -would enter, - -\tocf{\tabletocformat{\hp\chapternumber.\tablenumber - \quad\tabletitle\leader\pn}} - -and the first table of the second chapter would print in the contents as: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 2.1 The Nineteenth Century and after best-sellers | -| and steady-sellers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -ã|hangingtableindentã% controls the amount of indent before printing the -table title when you print using: - -\hangingnumber{\tablenumber} - - ã|Notes:ã% -The \tableofcontentsformat markup should always appear at the top of a -document, but after \monospace, if both are used. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b7503bd102..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/toclbr.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| toclinebreak | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\toclbrã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \toclinebreak markup causes a line to finish without interrupting a -paragraph in the table of contents. Occasionally it is necessary to break -a line in a precise place within a paragraph, as opposed to letting TEXT1 -decide where to break the line. This markup does not end a paragraph, it -simply starts the following text of the paragraph on a new line in the table -of contents instead of concatenating it to the end of the previous line. - - ã|Example:ã% -\chapter{More facts about Datapoint -information\toclbr processing\linebreak - and office -automation products,\lbr\toclbr -systems, and software} - -will print the chapter title on three lines in the text of the document: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| More facts about Datapoint information processing | -| and office automation products, | -| systems, and software | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -and on three lines in the table of contents: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| 1. More facts about Datapoint information | -| processing and office automation products, | -| systems, and software . . . .... . . ...... . . .... . . ...... . . 32 | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3d9a1bd87c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/today.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| today | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \today markup prints the current date in a standard format, "month day, -year". - - ã|Example:ã% -\rightlinesbegin -John R. Bays -Philosophy 484 -\today -\rightlinesend - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| John R. Bays | -| Philosophy 484 | -| January 15, 1987 | -| | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven deleted file mode 100644 index a839ce01d1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpeven +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the -title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the -\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command -has the format: - - \evenpages{ - \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr} - } - -where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the -information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be -printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified. -For example: - - \evenpages{ - \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber} - \topline2{\rule}{}{} - } - -will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe -Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page -number on the top far right of the first line of each even page. On the second -line of each even page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text. -The running toptitle of page 4 would look like this: - -Joe Smith June 3, 1984 4 -_______________________________________________________________________________ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp deleted file mode 100644 index 592dd44217..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topline1.helpoddp +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \topline1-5 COMMANDS | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \topline1-5 commands set what will appear at the top of each page after the -title page. The \topline1-5 command is always used in conjunction with the -\bothpages (\bp), \evenpages (\ep), or \oddpages (\op) command. This command -has the format: - - \oddpages{ - \toplineX{llll}{cccc}{rrrr} - } - -where "X" may be 1-5 and refers to the toptitle line number; "llll" is the -information to be printed left justified; "cccc" is the information to be -printed centered; and "rrrr" is the information to be printed right justified. -For example: - - \oddpages{ - \topline1{Joe Smith}{June 3, 1984}{\pagenumber} - \topline2{\rule}{}{} - } - -will space down the amount specified on the \topmargin command and put "Joe -Smith" at the top far left, with "June 3, 1984" centered and the current page -number on the top far right of the first line of each odd page. On the second -line of each odd page will be a horizontal line across the width of the text. -The running toptitle of page 5 would look like this: - -Joe Smith June 3, 1984 5 -_______________________________________________________________________________ diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage deleted file mode 100644 index 407c650c62..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/topmargi.helppage +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \topmargin (\tma) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \topmargin (\tma) command will set the distance from the top of the page to -the top of the running top title text. This command has the format: - - \topmargin{uu} - -where "uu" is the unit of measurement in number of lines or in any valid TeX -measurement (pt, pc, in, etc.). The default top margin is one inch, or -\topmargin{1IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX input -file before any actual text is entered. - -In order to change the top margin from the default of one inch to one-half -inch, you would enter: - - \tma{.5in} - -Which would give you one-half inch between the top of the page to the top of -the running top title. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index b0e3f5dc3d..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tp.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| titlepage | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\tpã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages. -It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered -title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is -numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in -the footing. - By default, the first page of any paper is a title page in TEXT1, -although it can be suppressed by \notitlepage. Furthermore, title pages can -be added anywhere in a paper using \titlepage. Since the title page usually -receives different treatment from body pages, there is separate markup for -it. By default, the title page adds 1 inch to the top margin and does not -print a running foot line at the bottom of the page. - The next page after a title page in TEXT1 is always assumed to be a -\notitlepage. - - ã|Example:ã% -Some applications have more than one page in the document which are not -to carry a running top title. For example, if you want a chapter to -always print without a running top title, you could add \titlepage to the -\chapterformat markup: - -\chapterformat{\numberingstyle{1} - \titleformat{\dumpinsertseject - \titlepage - \cl{\twelvept\bd Chapter \chapternumber} - \cl{\twelvept\bd \chaptertitle} - \vs{1\bl} - \setsubheadanumber{0} - \setsubheadbnumber{0} - \setsubheadcnumber{0} - \setsubheaddnumber{0}} - - \incontents{yes}} - - ã|Notes:ã% -Use the \titlepageformat to change the defaults on the title page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 61299a89b1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tpf.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| titlepageformat | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{1in} - \titlefootline{} - } - -Abbreviation: ã|\tpfã% - -Parameters: ã|submarkupã% - -Submarkup: ã|\titleleadskip, \titlefootlineã% - - ã|Description:ã% -By convention, a title page is a display page, differing from body pages. -It usually has sinkage (extra vertical space before the title), a centered -title (in bold or larger type), and a blind folio (where the page is -numbered but the number is not printed). It may also have special text in -the footing. The \titlepageformat markup changes the heading and footing of -a titlepage. - -ã|titleleadskipã% is the amount of space to be left at the top of title -pages, in addition to the top margin. By default, there is a 1 inch lead -skip and a 1 inch top margin, making for a 2 inch white space at the top of -each title page. - -ã|titlefootlineã% is the footing at the bottom of a title page. Similar -in function to the running foot, its difference is that you do not specify -\bothpage, \evenpage, or \oddpage with \titlefootline. - - ã|Example:ã% -If you want to add 3 inches to the top margin, and print "Bays" at the -bottom of the page with the page number, enter: - -\titlepageformat{\titleleadskip{3in} - \titlefootline{\line{\lft{Bays}\rt{\pn}}} - } - -which prints a footing at the bottom of the page like: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -| | -| Bays 3 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 25af085df6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/tt.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| typewriter | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\ttã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Typewriter is a medium-weight uniformly spaced type face. You get this face -when you enter \typewriter. Each character has the same width. It is handy -in \asisbegin blocks. - - ã|Example:ã% -Using the typewriter font, - -\asisbegin -And yet not cloy thy lips 1 - with loath'd satiety, 2 -But rather famish them 3 - - amid their plenty, 4 -\asisend - -you get the line number on the right to line up: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -| | -| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 | -| with loath'd satiety, 2 | -| But rather famish them 3 | -| amid their plenty, 4 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Without \typewriter you get: - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| And yet not cloy thy lips 1 | -| with loath'd satiety, 2 | -| But rather famish them 3 | -| amid their plenty, 4 | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - - ã|Notes:ã% -none. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index eac46c836c..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twc.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| twocolumns | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\twcã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \twocolumns markup formats text in two columns with identical width. -The column widths and gutter are calculated automatically within the -specified margins. The default width of both columns is 48% of the -galleywidth. The default gutter width is 4% of the galleywidth. - The Flexible format allows the user to use single column, two column, -and three column text interchangeably on the current page by entering one of -the markup choices at the desired point in the text. The flexible format -will balance the text columns whenever the number of columns changes. - For example, if the author changes the multiple column format by -typing a different markup TEXT1 will automatically balance the columns it -is currently processing and change to a new number of columns. These -instructions can be inserted at any point on the page. - The author may want to handle tables and other large blocks of text by -returning to a single column for the table by typing \onecolumn immediately -before the table and returning to two or three column formatting immediately -after the table. - All running head, running foot, and inserts are printed across the -full single column width that prints across the top of the current page. -Footnotes will be printed across the full width at the bottom of the page. - - ã|Example:ã% -\twocolumns -\nin Hebrew is called a Semitic language because it has -its roots in Shem, one of the sons of Noah. -Viewing Jerusalem as its center, it is related to the -northern, rougher Aramaic, and to the southern, more -polished Arabic. It has a freshness, simplicity and -power that few modern languages possess. Bounds of the -ancient Semitic tongue were approximately the -Mediterranean Sea on the west, the Euphrates and Tigris -Rivers on the easy, -the mountains of Armenia on the north, -and the coast of Arabia on the south. Consider the first -character, N . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Hebrew is called languages pos- | -| a Semitic lan- sess. Bounds | -| guage because it of the ancient | -| has its roots Semitic tongue | -| in Shem, one were approxi- | -| of the sons of mately the Medi- | -| Noah. View- terranean Sea on | -| ing Jerusalem as the west, the | -| its center, it Euphrates and | -| is related to Tigris Rivers on | -| the northern, the easy, the | -| rougher Aramaic, mountains of Ar- | -| and to the menia on the | -| southern, more north, and the | -| polished Arabic. coast of Ara- | -| It has a fresh- bia on the | -| ness, simplic- south. Consider | -| ity and power the first char- | -| that few modern acter, N . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -To change the column width or the gutter width, use the \multicolumnformat -markup. - You cannot specify \twocolumns inside of \vbox, \drawbox, \paragraphbox, -or a floating \figure (non floating figures, \nofloat, are ok). - If you want footnotes and figures to print in one column instead of -across both columns, use the \fixedformat markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 3a4cfcfd53..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/twelvept.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| twelvept | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|noneã% - - ã|Description:ã% -There are two default \selectfontsets established when you format a TEXT1 -file: \twelvept for the 12 point size Computer Modern serif typestyle; and -\tenpt for the 10 point Computer Modern serif typestyle. - The font set includes the following nine faces, each of which is called -by adding a backslash in front of the name, or using the abbreviation: -\roman (\rm), \bold (\bd), \italic (\it), \typewriter (\tt), \caps (\cc), -\mathitalic (\mi), \symbol (\sy), \extension (\ex), and \bolditalic (\bi). - - ã|Example:ã% -Consider this example for switching from 12 point to a 10 point size. - -\tenpt -\centerline{\twelvept\bd Sociogeology} -\centerline{\it by Achilles Chert} -"Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Sociogeology | -| by Achilles Chert | -| "Does the absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -There are some markup, such as \tableformat, \runningheadformat, \run- -ningfootformat, \chapterformat, \partformat and the other heading markup. -If you want to use another 12 point font set (like Plantin) as the -default instead of Computer Modern, you must give that set the same name, -"twelvept": - -\selectfontset{pl10}{tenpt}{default} -\selectfontset{pl12}{twelvept}{default} -\selectmathset{cg97m}{mathdefault} -\twelvept diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 29e63f08f1..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/us.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| underscore | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\usã% - -Parameters: ã|textã% - - ã|Description:ã% -Underscoring, drawing a line under words or sentences, is also used for -emphasis and to indicate book titles. - - ã|Example:ã% - -Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous -book, \us{The} \us{Intact} \us{Societies:} -\us{Vestals} \us{and} \us{Volcanos} -\us{in} \us{the} \us{South Pacific}, which suggests . . . -ff -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| Figure 1 shows a schema borrowed from my previous book, The Intact | -| Societies: Vestals and Volcanos in the South Pacific, which suggests | -| . . . | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -In proportional spacing, the \underscore markup has the occasional -disadvantage of preventing hyphenation and line breaking, which can result -in awkward or impossible interword spacing and line breaks. To remedy this, -put each word to be underscored inside of its own \underscore markup as -illustrated above. - Do not use \underscore in math mode; use \underline instead. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 981ddf97ae..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vbox.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,32 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| vbox | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|box materialã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \vbox markup has many uses. One use is to be able to put multiple lines -into a \drawbox markup. - - ã|Example:ã% -\drawbox{\vbox{The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena -is the research arm of Giga Geologicals, -Inc. No apologies -are tendered for the nonverifiability of experiments. -The opinions of the authors do not reflect -company policy.}} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| ........................................................................... | -| . The Center for Unpleasant Phenomena is the research arm of Gig . | -| . Geologicals, Inc. No apologies are tendered for the nonverifiability of . | -| . experiments. The opinions of the authors do not reflect company policy. . | -| ........................................................................... | -| | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+. - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on this markup. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert deleted file mode 100644 index 872fadaa4f..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vertical.helpvert +++ /dev/null @@ -1,21 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \verticalspace (\vs) COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \verticalspace (\vs) command will leave the specified amount of space or -the specified number of blank lines in the text. This command will also force -the following text into a new paragraph. The format for the \verticalspace -(\vs) command is: - - \verticalspace{x} - -Where "x" is the number of blank lines or space you wish to leave. For -example, - - \verticalspace{4\bl} - -will leave four blank lines, and - - \verticalspace{2in} - -will leave two inches of blank space. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 60e469f102..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vrule.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| vrule | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|noneã% - -Parameters: ã|dimensionã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \vrule markup draws a vertical rule. It is a native TEX markup, and -the usage is different in that the parameter is not surrounded with curly -braces. If you do not supply a dimension, TEXT1 will print the rule with -a height of the highest character in that line and the depth of the deepest -character in that line. By default, the rule drawn has a thickness (width) -of .4pt. - - ã|Notes:ã% -Refer to The TEXbook for more on \vrule and how to use the "depth" parameter -with the "height" and "width" parameters. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index fb1a1cc8f6..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vs.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| verticalspace | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\vsã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \verticalspace markup creates blank lines (or space) on a page. This -markup causes a break in text and leaves a specified amount of space within -a page. Any following text starts a new paragraph. The total amount of -white space left is the units of measure (dimension) in the \verticalspace, -plus the current paragraph skip value. This markup is followed by a -parameter, which can be entered in whole blank lines, inches, points, or -other valid units of measure. - - ã|Example:ã% -\verticalspace{24pt} - -{\bd Minerals and Human Behavior} -\verticalspace{1\bl} -"Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert -Camus, a novelist who lionized the labors of . . . - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| | -| | -| Minerals and Human Behavior | -| | -| "Does the Absurd dictate death?" asks Albert Camus, a novelist who | -| lionized the labors of . . . | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% -You can tell TEXT1 you want a variable amount of white space between lines -by entering something line: - -\verticalspace{10pt plus 2pt minus 1pt} - -which tells TEXT1 you want 10 points of white space in addition to the -paragraph skip. If TEXT1 cannot balance text to the bottom of the page -when \normalbottom is in effect (which is the default), then the above -specification allows TEXT1 to add up to 2 points of white space or subtract -up to 1 point of white space from the 10 points of white space. - If you enter a \verticalspace markup at the top of a page it will be -ignored. Putting a \verticalspace at the bottom of a page is risky, also, -if the amount of space left on the page is less than the amount asked for. -The difference will not be carried over to the following page; it will be -lost. Both difficulties can be resolved by using a required space markup, -\verticalspacekeep. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark deleted file mode 100644 index 12befa9880..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/vsk.helpmark +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| verticalspacekeep | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -Abbreviation: ã|\vskã% - -Parameters: ã|units of measureã% - - ã|Description:ã% -The \verticalspacekeep markup leaves a required amount of space, for a -figure, plate, or table. The space will always be kept together on -the current page or printed at the top of the next page if not enough -space remains on the current page. Text that follows a \verticalspacekeep -will not be used to fill in the current page if the required space is -moved to the following page. The amount of white space left is the -\verticalspacekeep dimension plus the current paragraph skip value. - - ã|Example:ã% -\verticalspacekeep{2in} - -{\bd Sociogeology} -{\it Minerals and Human Behavior} - -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| | -| Sociogeology Minerals and Human Behavior | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - - ã|Notes:ã% - -\verticalspacekeep is the best way to have white space left at the top of a -page. \verticalspace will not leave white space at the top of a page. diff --git a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage b/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage deleted file mode 100644 index ec89a93efc..0000000000 --- a/macros/text1/cms_help_files/width.helppage +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ -| TEXT1 \width COMMAND | -+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+ - -The \width command specifies the width of the page that will be used for -printing the file. The format is: - - \width{uu} - -where "uu" is the unit of measurement in any valid TeX measurement (pt, pc, in, -etc.) or number of 10-pitch characters. The default page width is 8.5 inches, -or \width{8.5IN}. This command may only appear at the beginning of the TeX -input file before any actual text is entered. |